You are on page 1of 276

M139_UM_usa1.

book Page 1 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

2009 Owner's Manual


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 2 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Dear Customer,
thank you for choosing a MASERATI.
This vehicle represents the result of MASERATI's great experience in the design and construction of sports, touring and
racing vehicles.
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with an understanding of the equipment, systems and controls in the vehicle
and to explain how they work.
In the final section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures and the complete
Maintenance Schedule, which are needed to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving.
In addition, keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time
and protect the environment.
For Scheduled Maintenance or any other operation, please contact the Maserati Dealers: you can trust their trained
technical staff, who are constantly updated and provided with the equipment required to ensure that all service operations
are performed properly and reliably.
For improved safety, we recommend that you to read this manual carefully before driving the vehicle.
The Owner's Manual is an integral part of the vehicle and it must always be kept on board.

2
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 3 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

3
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 4 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Historical info 1934 1961


Giuseppe Furmanik in a Type 4CM: The 3500 GT is the first Italian vehicle
1914 World land speed record in the class to adopt fuel injection.
The Alfieri Maserati garage is founded 1100 at 222 kph.
in Bologna.
1963
1939 Production begins of the Mistral and
1926 Wilbur Shaw on a 8CTF wins the the Quattroporte, the fastest sedan car
Targa Florio, Tipo 26: debut and victory Indianapolis 500: Maserati is to remain in the world.
of a vehicle sporting the Trident the first and only Italian manufacturer
symbol on the hood, inspired by the to win on the legendary Indy motor 1966
statue of Neptune in Bologna. speedway. The Ghibli is presented, a coupé
designed by Giugiaro.
1927 1940
Emilio Maserati becomes the outright The company moves headquarters to 1968
Italian champion with the Type 26. Modena. The Citrôen becomes a partner in the
company and the V6 engine goes into
1929 1947 production.
Baconin Borzacchini in the Type V4: The first Granturismo is built: the A6 The 2+2 Indy is presented.
World land speed record over 10 km at 1500 with bodywork by Pininfarina.
246 kph. The A6GCS racing version debuts 1971
victoriously with Alberto Ascari on the The Bora is presented, the first
1930 Maserati Granturismo with a central
Modena circuit.
Borzacchini in the Type V4: first Grand engine.
Prix victory in Tripoli. 1954 Followed a year later by the Merak.
The 250F, the single-seater which will
1933 1973
allow the Maserati to win the Formula
Maserati, the most prestigious 1 World Championships, makes its first The Khamsin, designed by Bertone,
European manufacturer introduces the appearance winning in Argentina. replaces the Ghibli.
hydraulic brake control in its racing
vehicles. Giuseppe Campari in a Type 1957 1975
8CM wins the French Grand Prix and Fangio in the 250F wins the world title. Citrôen leaves the company, which is
Tazio Nuvolari wins in Belgium and At the end of the season, Maserati then bought out by Alejandro De
Nice. officially withdraws from racing. Tomaso.

4 Historical info
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 5 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

1976 2000 2007


The new Quattroporte is presented, Alfieri Maserati Garage Customization The Granturismo, Coupè 2+2 comes to
designed by Giugiaro, Program. life.
which will go on to be used as the
official car of the President of the 2001
Italian Republic. Production begins of the Spyder with
4200 eight-cylinder engine and the
1981 electro-hydraulic, steering-wheel
De Tomaso changes marketing mounted gearbox "Cambiocorsa".
strategy and starts production of the Alfieri Maserati garages.
Biturbo, a two-door sedan with a six-
cylinder engine. 2002
The 2+2 Coupè is presented.
1989
The Shamal is the first vehicle to adopt 2003
the new biturbo eight-cylinder engine. A return to racing with the TROFEO.
The Quattroporte designed by
1993 Pininfarina is presented, also used as
Fiat Auto buys out the entire Maserati presidential car by the President of the
share package and in 1998 presents Italian Republic.
the Quattroporte.
2004
1997 The MC12 with 630 HP 12-cylinder
Ferrari acquires the majority of engine is born
Maserati shareholding.
2005
1998 Maserati wins the FIA GT
Quattroporte Evoluzione V8 3.2 - V6 championship with the MC12.
2.8. 2006
3200 GT V8. Presentation of the Quattroporte with
automatic gearbox.
1999
3200 GT V8 Automatica.

Historical info 5
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 6 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Quattroporte 1963

Quattroporte 1976

Quattroporte 1965

6 Historical info
Cap1_usa.fm Page 7 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 8:48 AM

Introduction Abbreviations Updating


Some descriptions and terms with The vehicle's high quality level is
Consulting the Manual particular meanings are found in this enhanced by constant improvements.
manual in an abbreviated form: Therefore, there may prove to be
To facilitate reading and rapid use, the
A.C. - AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM differences between this manual and
topics are sub-divided into SECTIONS
your vehicle.
and CHAPTERS. ABS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM -
All specifications and illustrations
The important parts requiring Wheel locking prevention
contained in this manual refer to those
particular attention are easily system during braking
resulting as of the printing date, and
identifiable in the sections and ALC - ADAPTIVE LIGHT CONTROL - are subject to change without notice.
chapters: Automatic headlight aiming
system
EXTREME CAUTION ASR - ANTI-SLIP REGULATION -
REQUIRED: failure to comply Prevention of skidding during
with the instructions could acceleration
cause hazardous situations involving
personal and vehicle safety! CAN - CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK
DRL - DAY RUNNING LIGHTS
WARNING: aimed at preventing any EBD - ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE
damage to the vehicle and thus DISTRIBUTION - Electronically
hazards involving the safety of controlled distributor of
persons. braking force
EPB - ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
ECU - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
ETD - EMERGENCY TENSIONING
DEVICE
MSP - MASERATI STABILITY
PROGRAM - Yaw prevention
monitoring system
TPMS - TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM.

Introduction 7
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 8 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Service For correct use of the gearbox system, Bose® Infotainment


The information contained in this follow the instructions given in the The vehicle is equipped with the
manual is limited to those instructions specific chapter of this manual. Maserati IT "Bose® Infotainment"
and indications that are strictly system, which includes the following
required for the use and maintenance
NHTSA’s Toll-free features as standard:
of the vehicle.
Auto Safety Hotline
– on-board computer;
The Owner will certainly obtain If you believe that your vehicle has a
– satellite navigation system (where
greater satisfaction and the best defect which could cause a crash, injury
digital maps are available);
results from the vehicle by following or death, You should immediately
these instructions carefully. inform the National Highway Traffic – Bose® Surround Sound;
We also advise you to have all the Safety Administration (NHTSA) in – single CD-reader.
maintenance services and inspections addition to notifying Maserati S.p.A. On request, these features can be
carried out at your local Authorized or Maserati North America, Inc. further enriched with Bluetooth
Maserati Dealer, where you will find function, AUX socket and USB socket.
specialized staff and suitable If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
equipment. may open an investigation, and if it
See the "SALES AND SERVICE finds that a safety defect exists in a
ORGANIZATION" manual for locations group of vehicles, it may order a recall
of AUTHORIZED MASERATI DEALERS. and remedy campaign. However,
Your local Authorized Maserati Dealer NHTSA cannot become involved in
is at your complete disposal for any individual problems between you,
information and suggestions. your dealer, or Maserati North
America, Inc.
Automatic gearbox
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
The vehicle is equipped with an
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
electronically-controlled automatic
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
gearbox system which, in addition to
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
the normal automatic gearshift
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
functions, allows the user to shift gears
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
in sequence and manually, once the
You can also obtain other information
specific mode has been selected.
about motor vehicle safety from http:/
/www.safercar.gov.

8 Introduction
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 9 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

“Run Flat” tires (optional) After 75 mi. (120 km), the warning not Towing the vehicle
The vehicle can be fitted with “Run to continue will be displayed. The vehicle has not been designed,
Flat” tires. This kind of tire is equipped For further information on the display, developed or homologated to be used
with reinforced sidewalls which please refer to chapter: “Tire pressure as a towing vehicle (e.g., trailers,
permit the vehicle to continue monitoring system” on page 47. caravans, etc.) and nothing may be
traveling at moderate speed (50 mph - loaded on the roof; fitting structures
WARNING: Always comply with the
80 km/h), even in the event of a such as bars or roof-racks may damage
specified wheel alignment values, as
puncture, for a set distance. the vehicle.
this is fundamental to obtain the best
When the control panel receives the
performance from and the longest life
“punctured tire” information from the
of your tires.
tire pressure ECU, it monitors the
residual tire life by showing a warning
signal in the relevant area on the
display after 31 mi. (50 km) and 62 mi.
(100 km).

Standard Run flat

0 psi - 0 bar

0 psi - 0 bar

Introduction 9
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 10 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Symbols Danger symbols Symbols of prohibitions


Battery Battery
There are specific colored labels on or Corrosive liquid. Do not approach with open
near some of the components on your flames.
MASERATI. The related symbols are
important warnings that the user must Battery Battery
follow when using the component Explosion Keep children at a safe
involved. distance.
All of the symbols included in the
labelling on your MASERATI are listed Fan Heat guards - belts - pulleys
concisely here below, along with the It can start up automatically - fans
component involved with that symbol. even with the engine stopped. Do not rest your hands on
In addition, the meaning of the symbol these parts.
shown is also indicated in terms of the Expansion tank
following sub-division: danger, Do not remove the cap when Engine compartment ECU
the coolant is hot. protection cover
prohibition, warning, compulsory -
Do not direct the jet of water
with respect to that same symbol.
Coil on the ECUs, relays and fuses.
High voltage.

Belts and pulleys


Moving devices: keep body
parts and clothing away.

Air-conditioning lines
Do not open. Gas under high
pressure.

10 Symbols
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 11 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Warning symbols Engine Symbols indicating compulsory


Use only the lubricant measures
Catalytic muffler recommended in the section
Do not park or stop over “Capacities and Technical Battery
flammable surfaces. Refer to specifications”. Protect your eyes.
chapter: “Air Quality devices”.
Vehicle using lead-free
Hydraulic steering gasoline Battery - Jack
Do not exceed the maximum Only “Premium gasoline” with Refer to the Owner's Manual.
level of fluid in the tank. Only an AKI (Anti Knock Index)
use fluid of the type rating not lower than 91
prescribed in the section (approximately 96 R.O.N.) WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its
“Capacities and technical must be used. constituents, and certain car
specifications”. components contain or emit chemicals
Expansion tank known to the State of California to
Brake circuit Only use fluid of the type cause cancer and birth defects or other
Do not exceed the maximum prescribed in the section reproductive harm.
level of fluid in the tank. Only “Capacities and technical In addition, certain fluids contained in
use fluid of the type specifications”. cars and certain products of
prescribed in the section component wear contain or emit
“Capacities and technical chemicals known to the State of
specifications”. California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Windshield wipers
Only use fluid of the type
prescribed in the section
“Capacities and technical
specifications”.

Symbols 11
Cap1_FOTO.fm Page 12 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:00 PM

12
Cap1_FOTO.fm Page 13 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:00 PM

Contents

Vehicle identification data 1

Active and passive safety 2

Instruments and controls 3

Before you drive 4

Using the vehicle 5

In an emergency 6

Capacities and technical specifications 7

Maintenance 8

Table of contents 9

13
Cap1_FOTO.fm Page 14 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:00 PM

14
Cap1_FOTO.fm Page 15 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:00 PM

Vehicle identification data

Identification plates 16
1
Homologation labels 17
Instruction labels 19
Key codes 21

15
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 16 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Identification plates Engine marking


The engine serial number is stamped
Chassis marking on the lower part of the crankcase, in
the starter motor area.
The vehicle's registration number is
The engine type is indicated on the
1 punched on the underfloor, in front of
plate positioned on the front, left-
the right-hand front seat.
hand door jamb.
To read the number, lift the mat and
remove the guard.

16 Identification plates
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 17 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Homologation labels
– Label for compliance with safety – V.I.N. label; – Chassis type and number;
standards;

Homologation labels 17
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 18 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Emission control data label.

18 Homologation labels
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 19 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Instruction labels
– Tire specification label; – Lubricant label; – Mercury content warning label;

Instruction labels 19
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 20 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Anti-freeze label.

20 Instruction labels
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 21 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Key codes WARNING: The code numbers shown WARNING: In the event of a vehicle
on the CODE CARD should be kept in a ownership transfer, it is essential that
safe place. the new owner is provided with all the
A CODE CARD is supplied with the
keys and with the CODE CARD.
keys. This card indicates the following: WARNING: You are advised to always
– the electronic code A to be used in
the procedure for “emergency
keep the CODE CARD number with WARNING: It is advisable to write 1
you, as this is absolutely necessary in down and keep the codes listed on the
starts” the event of an “emergency start”. plates delivered with the keys and the
– the mechanical key code B to be remote control in a safe place (not in
given to your local Authorized the car) in order to request duplicates
Maserati Dealer when ordering if needed.
duplicate keys.

A
B

Key codes 21
Cap2_FOTO.fm Page 22 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:04 PM

22
Cap2_FOTO.fm Page 23 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:04 PM

Active and passive safety

Seat belts 24
Proper transport of children 29
Front and side airbags 36
2
MSP System 43
ASR system (electronic anti-skid device) 44
ABS and EBD systems 45
Tire pressure monitoring system 47
Parking sensors 54
Fuel cut-out inertia switch 58

23
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 24 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Seat belts When the belt is released and fully A buzzer is also activated for approx. 8
retracted, the system deactivates and seconds when the warning light is on.
resumes its normal operation. The retractor locking device is
The vehicle is equipped with seat belts
designed to activate whenever the belt
with automatic retractor designed for
Do not pass seat belts over is pulled out too rapidly or in case of
maximum freedom of movement.
sharp edges. They could tear. sudden braking or collision.
The seat belts are equipped with
If the belt locks due to too rapid
electronically-controlled load limiting
Do not pin anything to the extraction, allow it to retract a short
devices and pretensioners. In addition,
2 the attachment points of all the seat seat belts. This could reduce distance to disengage the locking
their initial strength and cause device.
belts are directly attached to the seat,
them to tear in the event of a crash. The retractor is designed to allow the
in order to help ensure optimal
belt to automatically fit to the
protection, whatever the seat position.
Always deactivate this feature passenger’s body, allowing free
prior to using the seat belt for movement.
Maserati urges you to use the
normal use. Having the When the vehicle is parked on a steep
seat belts correctly fastened
retractor locked can be dangerous slope, the retractor may lock: this is
and adjusted at all times!
when the seat belt is used for directly normal.
Correct use of the seat belts restraining a passenger.
WARNING: Feed the belt back into the
can help reduce the risk of
Fastening the seat belts retractor by hand to avoid twisting and
serious injury in the event of
snagging.
an accident. Extract the lower section of the seat
belt from the outer side of the seat and
The passenger and rear side seats are secure it by holding the fastening tang
equipped with KISI System, which A, and pulling out the belt until the
improves safety when children are tang inserts into the buckle lock B.
traveling in special child seats. The The belt is correctly engaged when the A
system is activated by pulling out the lock clicks into position. To release the
belt to its full length: once the child belts, press button C. B
seat is securely fastened, the belt can If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
no longer be pulled out and hence the or improperly fastened, the warning
belt/child seat system is exceptionally light on the instrument panel C
secure. illuminates.

24 Seat belts
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 25 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Adjusting the front seat belts Do not bring cutting edges in Using the rear seat belts
height (front seats only) contact with a seat belt. This
The belts for the rear seats must be
could reduce their initial
worn as shown in the figure.
The seat belts height must be strength and cause them to tear in the
adjusted only with the vehicle event of a crash.
Remember that, in the event
stationary. If a seat belt has been brought in
of a violent impact, the
contact with a cutting edge, or has
passengers on the rear seats
Always adjust the height of the front been used to pin something to it, have
that are not wearing the seat belts are
seat belts so that they suit the driver's it immediately replaced at your 2
not only subject to personal injury but
and passenger's height. This Authorized Maserati Dealer.
they also represent a danger for
precaution can help to substantially
passengers sitting in the front seats.
reduce the risk of injury in a collision. To move the attachment fitting, press
The correct adjustment is achieved control D.
The seat belts must be worn keeping
when the belt passes about mid-way
your chest in the upright position and
between the end of the shoulder and After the adjustment, always
lying against the backrest.
the neck. check that the slider to which
When the rear seats are not occupied,
The upper attachment point of the the oscillating ring is fixed, is
place the seat belt buckles in their
seat belts is equipped with an locked into one of the positions
respective seatings.
oscillating ring capable of moving into provided. With the handgrip released,
4 different positions, allowing the push again downward to allow the
belts position to be adjusted. anchoring device to click into place, in
the event that it has not been released
in one of the positions provided.

Seat belts 25
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 26 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Load limiting devices After the pretensioner activation, the WARNING: Work on the vehicle which
seat belt can be unfastened as usual, involves blows, vibrations or localized
To help increase passive safety levels,
by pressing the button on the buckle. heating in the area of the
the seat belt retractors are equipped
The pretensioner does not require any pretensioners may damage or activate
with a load limiting device designed to
maintenance or lubrication. them: vibrations due to uneven road
control the belt reeling out, so that the
surfaces or unintentional underbody
force exerted on the shoulders while
WARNING: Tampering with the device collisions, for instance, should not
the seat belt is in restraining mode can
will compromise its efficient affect the units. Contact your local
be suitably adjusted.
2 operation. If, as a result of exceptional Authorized Maserati Dealer for any
natural circumstances (e.g., floods, intervention that may be required.
Pretensioners
heavy seas, etc.), the device has been in
To further enhance the seat belt contact with water and sludge, it is It is strictly forbidden to
efficiency, the vehicle seat belts (except mandatory to replace it. To help ensure remove or tamper with the
for the rear central one) are equipped the best protection from the pretensioner components.
with ETD (Emergency Tensioning pretensioners, wear the belt in such a Any intervention must be carried out
Device) pretensioners. way that it fits snugly against your only by qualified and authorized
These devices "detect", by means of a chest and pelvis. personnel. Always contact your local
sensor, that a violent crash is occurring Authorized Maserati Dealer.
and retract the belts by a few The pretensioners can be used
centimeters. Thisn helps ensure that only once and activate only
the belt perfectly adheres to the when the seat belts are
occupants’ bodies before the fastened. After activation, contact an
restraining action takes place. Authorized Maserati Dealer to have
The smoke is not toxic and does not the pretensioners replaced and for
indicate the presence of a fire. properly discarding the old
The pretensioners activate in the components. The units have a 14 year
following cases: service life from the date of
– Head-on and rear collisions of a manufacture; they must be replaced
sufficient severity when their service life is near to
expiration.
– In certain roll-overs
The pretensioner only activates when
the seat belt is fastened.

26 Seat belts
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 27 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

General warnings for using the could cause neck wounds or other When travelling with one or
seat belts injuries in an accident. Additionally, in more child seats fitted on the
an accident, the lower section of the rear seat of the vehicle, the
The driver and any passengers belt could press against the upper part tables (if equipped) must be in a closed
are obliged by law to respect of your stomach rather than the pelvic position.
and obey the provisions of area, causing serious internal injuries.
local legislation regarding the When the vehicle is moving
compulsory use of seat belts. Do not use child seats or child and the table(s) is open,

To help provide maximum


booster cushions/backrests in passengers travelling in the 2
the front passenger seat. rear seats must fasten their seat belts.
protection, you are advised to Occupants in the front passenger seat Travelling without the seat belt
keep the seatback in the most must never sit on the edge of the seat, fastened increases the risk of injury in
upright position possible and the seat leaning toward the instrument panel the event of a collision.
belt close to your chest and pelvis. If or otherwise sit out of position.
the seat belt is loose, in the event of The occupants' back must be as Always fasten the seat belts.
an accident you could move too far upright as comfort allows, and must Travelling without the seat
forward and could be injured. rest against the seatback with the seat belts fastened significantly
Travelling with the seatback too far belt properly fastened. Feet must be increases the risk of serious injury in
reclined could also be dangerous: even on the floor (i.e. not on the dashboard, the event of a collision, even with the
if the seat belts are fastened, they may seat or out of the window). airbags. In the event of a collision, the
not work correctly. In fact, the belt seat belts help reduce the possibility
itself may not be close enough to your of the vehicle's occupants being
body and, if it is in front of you, it thrown against the structures of the

Seat belts 27
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 28 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

passenger compartment or out of the not be distributed evenly along the Pregnant women must
vehicle. The airbags are designed to belt and would consequently cause observe local legislation
work together with the seat belts, not injuries. The upper part of the belt regarding the use of seat
to substitute them. The front airbags must pass over the shoulder and belts. Make sure, in any case, that the
only deploy in the event of certain diagonally across the chest. The lower lower section of the belt is positioned
head-on collisions of medium or high section must adhere to your pelvis, not well down on the hips, below the
intensity. They will not be activated if the stomach, to avoid that you slide abdominal region of the body.
the vehicle rolls over, or in the event of forward in the event of a collision. Do
2 rear bumps or minor frontal collisions, not use devices (clips, fastenings etc.) How to keep seat belts efficient
or non-frontal collisions. that prevent the seat belts from laying
1) Always use the seat belts keeping
close to the passenger bodies.
the belt perfectly flat, not twisted;
Do not fasten your seat belt
make sure the belt can slide freely,
using the buckle lock for the Do not carry children on a
without jamming.
other seat: in the event of an passenger’s lap using only one
accident, the lower section of the belt seat belt for protecting both 2) The seat belts must be replaced
could press against the upper part of of them. following every pretensioner
your stomach rather than the pelvic activation and whenever the belt itself
area, causing serious internal injuries. If the seat belt has suffered a shows visible damages or abrasions.
heavy mechanical stress, for 3) Wash the seat belts by hand using
It is extremely dangerous to example during a collision, it water and neutral soap, rinse them
travel with the belt positioned must be completely replaced together and let them dry in the shade. Do not
underneath your arm. In the with its anchorages, the screws use strong detergents, bleaches or
event of an accident, you would be fastening the said anchorages and the colorants and any other chemical
thrown forward and would likely pretensioner. In fact, even if there are substance that could weaken the belt
suffer head and neck injuries. no visible defects, the resistance level fibers.
Additionally, if the belt presses against offered by the seat belt could be 4) Make sure the retractors do not get
your ribs, it could cause serious reduced. wet: as they will not operate properly.
internal injuries.

The belt must not be twisted;


make sure that it is snugly
fitted to the driver's and
passenger's bodies. In fact, in an
accident, the restraining force would

28 Seat belts
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 29 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Proper transport of To help properly protect a child outside compliant with the U.S. Federal Motor
these limits, specific restraint systems Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
children with dedicated belts or accessories and with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
capable of adapting the child’s Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
For the best protection in the event of position to the vehicle’s seat belts must
a collision, all the vehicle's occupants be fitted. No child under 12 should
must travel seated and protected by all travel in the front passenger
the suitable restraining systems. The If a child seat is installed on seat.
seat belts are designed to be used by the front passenger's seat, the 2
persons whose physical characteristics seat must be positioned No child seat can be installed
(age, height, weight) are provided for completely backwards and upwards. in the rear, central seat.
by established legislation in each
country. Anyone who does not comply We recommend that child
with these provisions may not travel in seats be installed in the rear When traveling with one or
the front passenger seat. This also seating positions ONLY. more child seats fitted on the
applies to children. Their heads are rear seat of the vehicle, the
proportionally heavier and larger than Even with advanced airbags, tables must be closed.
those of adults, while their bones and children should always be
muscles are relatively undeveloped. To seated in the rear seats. The Children must never travel
help protect them in case of a collision, rear seat is the optimal location for seated on a passenger's lap.
they must use special restraint or children. In a collision, a child becomes
safety systems, even in the rear seat. The use of specific restraint systems for so heavy that it is impossible to hold
newborns and children is mandatory, onto him or her. For example, in the
Incorrect fastening of a child as provided by the law in all the 50 event of a collision at only 25 mph (40
restraint system increases the States of the United States, the District km/h), a child weighing 12 lbs (5.5 kg)
risk of injury to the child in the of Columbia, the USA territory and the exerts a force equal to 240 lbs (110 kg)
event of a collision. Canadian provinces. on the arms of the person carrying
Newborns and children must travel him/her. Children must always be
The seat belts on the vehicle have been seated in suitable restraint systems, protected by a suitable restraining
designed and tested to protect people using adequate safety abdominal or system when travelling.
weighing at least 79 lbs (36 Kg) and diagonal belts or, if present, an upper
taller than 59 in (1.50m). anchoring point and a system with 2
lower anchoring points, in order to be

Proper transport of children 29


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 30 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

WARNING: The vehicle is equipped distributed throughout the strongest We recommend that child
with airbag technology that no longer parts of the body, i.e., the back and seats be installed in the rear
uses a Passenger Airbag Off function shoulders. Babies must always be seating positions ONLY.
to indicate that the front passenger protected by a suitable restraining
seat is occupied. system when travelling. All minors whose physical
Children should be properly restrained characteristics (age, height, weight)
in suitable child seats, which must be Babies travelling in a fall within the value ranges/limits
properly installed in the vehicle rearward-facing seat may be provided by established legislation in
2 (following the child seat seriously injured in the event each country must also be protected by
manufacturer's instructions), and be of airbag activation. This could special restraint or safety systems (e.g.,
placed in the rear passenger seating happen because the seatback of the certified child seats, booster seats).
area. child's seat may be positioned Make sure to always use approved
extremely close to the airbag at the universal child restraining systems.
Children (or adults) who are moment it is inflated. Do not place an Follow the instructions that the
resting on the airbag or are infant or a child in the front passenger manufacturer of the device is required
too close to it when it is seat at any time. to supply together with the child
activated, may be seriously injured. restraint systems.
The airbags and pretensioners are The structure of a child's body To help ensure the best restraining
designed to offer suitable protection is completely different from action of the child seats, we
for adults and teenagers, but not for that of an adult or a teenager recommend that you choose the
children and babies. Neither the seat (whom the seat belts are designed model that best suits the shape of your
belts or the airbags are designed for for). Children's hips are so small that seats. If possible, try to install the seat
them. Children and babies must travel the seat belt will not stay in the correct on the vehicle before purchasing it.
in suitable restraining systems. position on them. The belt may rise up Do not install child seats that, when
on the child's stomach and, in the placed on the seat, have an unstable or
Babies must be supported event of a collision, can cause serious unnatural position due to the shape of
completely, including their internal injuries. Children must always your vehicle seat.
head and neck. This is be protected by suitable restraining
necessary since the babies neck is systems.
weak while their head is
proportionally bigger and heavier in
relation to their body. In a collision, if
a baby is travelling in a rearward-
facing seat, the forces of an impact are

30 Proper transport of children


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 31 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

In an emergency situation, if you have To help ensure the best the child seat manufacturer that the
to carry a baby in a specific child seat restraining action of the child system complies with the above
facing rearward on the front seat, we recommend that you mentioned standards, as certified by
passenger seat: choose the seat that best suits the the manufacturer declaration.
– adjust the front pasenger seat to the shape of your vehicle's seat and that
Whenever using a restraint
most rearward position; you try to install the child seat before
system for newborns or
purchasing it.
– install the child seat following the children, we recommend that
instructions provided by the child In the event of an accident, an you carefully read and follow the
seat's Manufacturer; improperly fastened child instructions provided by the child seat 2
– position all the movable parts of the restraining system can manufacturer on installation and use.
child seats (e.g., handle, reclining increase the risk of injury.
Please read and observe the
seatback, sunshade etc.) carefully Rearward-mounting child instructions on the warning
following the instructions provided seats must not be used on labels found inside the vehicle
by the Manufacturer and found on front passenger seats and on the restraint devices for
the instructions manual of the same equipped with airbags, as these could newborns and children.
child seat. cause serious injuries during inflation, To fasten the child seat to the
even in minor collisions. vehicle seat, follow the
The seat belts on the front passenger We recommend that you always carry assembly instructions
seat and on the rear side seats are children seated in their specific child provided with the restraint system
fitted with the KISI system, which seats, which must be fitted on the rear itself. Then fully pull out the seat belt
improves safety when children are seat, as this is the safest place in the to then let it rewind. During
travelling in special child seats. event of a collision. rewinding, you will hear a click sound:
The system is activated by pulling out No modifications can be made this means that the special retractor
the belt to its full length: to the seat belts and the child has activated. The seat belt is now
once the child seat is securely fastened, restraining systems. locked. Then push the child seat
the belt can no longer be pulled out Established legislation in some against the seat to rewind any excess
and hence the belt/child seat system is countries already provides that length of the seat belt. To deactivate
exceptionally secure. children under 12 years of age may not the retractor, unbuckle the seat belt
When the belt is released and fully travel in the front passenger seat. and let it rewind completely. The seat
retracted, the system deactivates and belt can now be used normally.
Check on the label found on
resumes its normal operation.
the child restraint system and
on the manual provided by

Proper transport of children 31


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 32 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Never unbuckle the seat belt Below is a summary of the safety Always drive slowly and
that retains the child seat regulations applying to the transport carefully when carrying a
when the vehicle is moving. of children: child. Hard accelerations due
We recommend that you always carry to sport-style driving can be
When the child seat is not
children in the specific restraining dangerous for children, even if no
used, remove it from the
systems installed in the rear outer crash occurs.
vehicle or fasten it using the
seat belt, in order to prevent it from seats, as this is usually the best place in
the event of a collision. Even with advanced airbags,
being projected out of the vehicle in
2 the event of an accident. Never leave Always and strictly follow the the rear seat is the safest
instructions that the manufacturer location for children.
children unattended in the vehicle,
provides with the seat. Whenever possible, always place
even if they are secured and seated in
Keep the instructions in the vehicle children in the rear seats.
their child seat. Unattended children in
a child seat may use some of the together with the documents and this
vehicle equipment and cause accidents manual. Do not use a seat which does
and/or serious personal injuries. not have any instructions for use.

Children whose weight/height are WARNING: We recommend that you


below the minimum limits established choose the seat that best suits the
by the manufacturer of the child shape of your vehicle's seat and that
restraint systems must use the you try to install the seat before
standard seat belts. Adjust the seat purchasing it.
belt in a diagonal position, across your
chest and on your shoulder, and not on Always pull on the seat belt to check
your neck or face. Starting from a that it is locked in place.
weight of 41 lbs (approximately 18.60 All restraint system must be used by a
Kg), it may be necessary to add a rise single passenger only: never carry two
cushion to obtain a correct position for children in the same seat.
fitting the seat belt, until the children Always check that the seat belts are
reach a sufficient height to have an not resting against the child's neck.
abdominal/diagonal seat belt suitably
fitted without needing a rise.

32 Proper transport of children


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 33 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Do not allow the child to assume This anchoring point can be easily These metal brackets are easily
incorrect positions or undo the seat identified thanks to the logo found on identifiable through the label bearing
belt /child seat safety harness during the Isofix bracket covering cap shown the logo shown below.
travel. below:
Do not carry children in your arms,
even new born children. Nobody,
however strong, can hold on to a child The seats designed for Latch system
in the event of a collision. Then anchor the base of the child seat child seats installation can however be
After an accident, always replace the to the brackets C. fitted with standard child seats; you 2
child seat with a new one. can install a standard and an Latch
The vehicle is designed for mounting Latch system system child seat at the same time (one
child seats with top anchoring. The rear side seats of the vehicle are in each outer rear seat).
To fit the child seat, run the belt A equipped with anchoring points for No more than two standard child seats
through the support pins of the Latch system child seats. This is a new or two Latch system type child seats
headrest and anchor it on one side to system complying with applicable can be installed on the rear seats.
the backrest of the child seat and on standards for carrying children. Only standard type child seats can be
the other side to the bracket B on the This system offers a special anchoring mounted on the front passenger seat.
car body. system for child seats, which uses two
metal brackets C positioned between Fit the child seat only when
the seat cushion and backrest. the vehicle is stationary. The
child seat is correctly anchored
to the provided brackets when a click
indicates it is locked in place. Follow
the mounting, removal and
positioning instructions provided by
A the child seat manufacturer.
C

Proper transport of children 33


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 34 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fitting the Latch system child Fitting the child seat in – align the anchoring points F with
seat in rearward-facing position frontward-facing position the brackets D, then push the seat
To fit the Latch system child seat in a For installation, proceed as follows: until you hear it click into place,
rearward-facing position, be which indicates it is secured
– make sure that the release lever E is
particularly careful that the brackets D in the standby position (retracted); – check for correct locking by trying to
are properly inserted in their seatings move the child seat with strength;
F. the safety mechanisms in fact, help
The baby is then secured by the child prevent the child seat from being
2 seat's harness G. improperly fitted if only one of the
attachment fittings is locked.
– pass the strap H underneath the rear
headrest and anchor it onto the child
H seat backrest and onto the bracket
on the car body.
This way, the child seat is retained not
G
only by the brackets D but also by the
vehicle seat belt and by the upper strap
H.
In any case, see the instruction booklet
provided with the child seat for fitting
the vehicle belts into the seat correctly.
F

D
F

F D

E
34 Proper transport of children
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 35 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Remember, the best child safety seat is Transport of persons with


the one that fits your child properly, is disability
easy to use, and fits in your vehicle If it is necessary to modify the
correctly. The best way to ensure a advanced airbag system of your vehicle
proper fit in your vehicle is to try to accommodate a person with
installing the child seat before disabilities, contact an Authorized
purchasing. Maserati Dealer.
You can be certain you’ve installed
your child safety or booster seat The advanced airbag system 2
correctly by having it checked at a child of your vehicle is not designed
safety seat inspection station or by a to protect adults with
certified child passenger safety disabilities that require deactivation of
technician. To find one near you, visit the passenger or driver airbag.
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov/CPS/
CPSFitting or www.seatcheck.org. You If you or or another occupant
can also call 1-888-DASH-2-DOT or is an adult with a medical
1-866-SEATCHECK. condition that requires airbag
deactivation, please contact an
Authorized Maserati Dealer.

As long as the airbag is


activated, persons with
disabilities are advised not to
travel in the front seat in order to
avoid the risk of serious injuries or
death, even in minor crashes.

Proper transport of children 35


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 36 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Front and side airbags

16 5
6
2 3
4

5 7

2
15

18 17

8
10

9
12
13

14
1 11

36 Front and side airbags


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 37 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

The vehicle is equipped with 6 airbags Front airbags • For crashes of higher severity, the
(2 front and 4 lateral ones) and with control unit will deploy the driver
electronically- controlled The airbag is not a substitute airbag in low energy mode.
pretentioners for all of the seats belts for the seat belts. Correct use • For crashes of even higher severity,
except for the rear central one. of the seat belts, in the control unit will deploy the driver
The system components are the combination with the airbag, will offer airbag in high energy mode.
following: protection for the driver and The front passenger’s airbag is
1) Electronic control unit passenger in the front seat in the designed to be deployed in certain
event of a head-on collision head-on collisions according to the 2
2) Passenger's front airbag
following strategy.
3) Front passenger seat belt Airbag system components • For low severity crashes, the airbag
pretensioner
The airbag system is composed of two control unit will not deploy the
4) Passenger side bag cushions that are designed to inflate airbags.
5) Satellite collision sensor on almost instantaneously. One (12) is on • For crashes of higher severity, the
passenger side the driver side, in the center of the control unit will deploy the airbag in
6) Passenger’s window bag steering wheel, and the other (2) is on low energy mode.
7) Driver’s window bag the passenger side, inside the • For crashes of even higher severity,
dashboard. the control unit will deploy the
8) Driver side bag
airbag in high energy mode.
9) Satellite collision sensor on driver Deployment
side The front airbags of your vehicle have Never place an object over or
10) Front, driver seat belt's been designed to inflate in 2 stages. near the driver and passenger
pretensioner This allows the airbag to have different airbags. In the event that the
11) Airbag system failure warning light rates of inflation based on the crash passenger airbag is deployed, it will
12) Driver's frontal airbag severity, as assessed by the airbag project any object over it, or near it, in
control unit. the passenger compartment at very
13) Clock Spring
The driver’s airbag is designed to be high speed. The object will be
14) Diagnostics socket deployed in certain head-on collisions transformed into a projectile propelled
15) Rear left-hand pretensioner according to the following strategy. in the passenger compartment. This
16) Rear right-hand pretensioner • For low severity crashes, the airbag could cause serious injuries.
17) Front left-hand Crash Zone Sensor control unit will not deploy the
airbag.
18) Front right-hand Crash Zone
Sensor.

Front and side airbags 37


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 38 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Do not tamper or damage the Operation and replacement Drive with your hands always
airbag modules. If, for any The airbags are controlled by an ECU on the rim of the steering
reason, an airbag cover gets that is designed to activate them in the wheel so that, in the case of
damaged, have the airbag module case of a head-on collision of sufficient activation, the airbag can inflate
immediately checked by an force. without obstruction. Placing hands or
Authorized Maserati Dealer. In the event of a collision with an arms inside the rim increases the risk
impact force that causes deceleration of arm/hand injuries in the event of a
Activation of a damaged exceeding the value set for the crash.
2 module could cause serious or internal sensor, the ECU will transmit a
fatal injuries. Please note that signal to deploy the airbags. The Always keep the seat backrest
your vehicle is not capable of airbags will begin to inflate, breaking in the upright position and sit
automatically detecting damages to the cover along the breakage line and with your back properly
the airbag cover. will inflate completely in a few resting against it.
milliseconds. Once inflated, they will Do not modify the system components
serve as a protection between the or wiring under any circumstances.
driver and/or passenger and the
structures that could cause injury. With the ignition key inserted
The airbags deflate immediately and in position II, although
afterwards. the engine is off, the airbags
can still be activated when the vehicle
The driver and passenger are is stationary if it is hit by a moving
both advised not to travel vehicle.
handling objects (e.g., Thus, even with the vehicle stationary,
beverage cans or bottles, pipes, etc,) do not put children in the front seat. In
that could cause injury in the event of addition, remember that if the ignition
airbag activation. key is in position 0, none of the safety
devices (airbags or pretensioner) are
WARNING: When the system starts activated in the event of a collision.
operating, gases are released in the Failure of the airbags to inflate in
form of fumes, together with the gas these circumstances is not indicative of
used for inflating the airbags. system malfunction.
These gases are not harmful.

38 Front and side airbags


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 39 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

WARNING: Do not cut or tamper with Damaged or defective The airbag modules must be
the connectors of the airbag harness or components of the airbag replaced at the intervals
on the airbag modules. system cannot be repaired but indicated in the “Warranty
Do not cover the steering wheel and must be replaced. Booklet and Maintenance Schedule”,
the top part on the instrument panel even if the vehicle was not involved in
on the passenger’s side with any tape WARNING: Improper intervention collisions.
or label, or treat it in any way. involving the system components can
Never remove the steering wheel. If cause failures or undesired activation The label A on the right-hand side of
necessary, this procedure should only of the airbags with damage resulting. the dashboard, bears the airbag 2
be performed by an Authorized The airbag system components have system expiration date. Please contact
Maserati Dealer. been specially designed for this specific an Authorized Maserati Dealer for
All the airbag system components vehicle model. Do not attempt to use replacement of the system when this
must be replaced after an accident that them on other vehicles, as this could date approaches.
has caused airbag deployment. cause serious injuries to passengers in The labels B, C and D indicate that the
Following an accident not involving the event of an accident. airbag system is installed.
airbag activation, you must contact an To scrap the vehicle, please contact an
Authorized Maserati Dealer to have Authorized Maserati Dealer to have Note: The label B on the dashboard can
the system checked and replace any the airbag system disposed of properly. be removed.
system components that may be If the vehicle has been stolen or there
damaged or malfunctioning. has been an attempted theft, have the
airbag system checked by an
Authorized Maserati Dealer.

B D

Front and side airbags 39


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 40 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Front and rear side airbags The bags inflate near instantaneously, The side airbags are not disabled when
The lateral airbags are designed to acting as a protection between the the front passenger airbag is
help enhance the protection offered to occupants body and the side of the deactivated. Thus even children being
passengers travelling in the front and vehicle. The bags deflate immediately transported in the front passenger seat
rear seats in case of moderate to severe afterwards. are protected from lateral collisions by
lateral collision. the side airbags.
WARNING: The electronic control unit The front and/or lateral airbags may
They consist of two types of near
provides for the activation of the also inflate if the vehicle suffers a
instantaneous inflation bags:
2 – Side Bags housed in the front seats
pretensioners, front airbags or side violent impact beneath the car body,
airbags (front and rear) based on for example when the underbody
backrests; this solution allows the different criteria, according to the type collides with steps or speed bumps,
airbag to be always in the of impact. potholes, etc.
approximate position with respect to The fact that one or more systems do
the occupant, regardless of the seat not activate is not indicative of a WARNING: Airbag inflation releases a
position. system malfunction. small amount of powder. This powder
– Window bags housed behind the is not harmful and does not indicate
roof lateral panels and covered by In the case of low impact lateral the presence of fire; furthermore the
special trim panels that do not collisions (for which the retaining surface of the deployed bag and the
interfere with the bags unfolding action of the seat belts affords interior of the vehicle may be covered
downwards during inflation. This adequate protection), the airbags are with a powdery residue: this powder
solution, designed to help protect not designed to inflate. may irritate skin and eyes. If contact
the head region, offers passengers It follows that the front airbags (on occurs, wash with a pH neutral soap
sitting in the front and in the rear driver and passenger side) do not and water.
appropiate protection in the case of replace or substitute the seat belts but
a side impact, thanks to the large supplement them, and hence the seat
area covered by the bags. belts must always be worn as provided
In the event of a side impact, an by established legislation in most
electronic control unit processes the countries.
signals coming from a deceleration
sensor and deploys the side airbags if
necessary.

40 Front and side airbags


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 41 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If the warning light comes WARNING: In the case of scrapping of General warnings
on when the vehicle is the vehicle, contact your local
running (indicating a fault), Authorized Maserati Dealer to have When the ignition key is
contact your local Authorized the system deactivated. turned to the MAR (ON)
Maserati Dealer as soon as possible to position, the warning light
have the system checked. WARNING: If the vehicle is sold, the comes on, but it switches off after
new owner must be informed of the approx. 5 seconds. If the warning light
WARNING: The airbag system has a aforesaid instructions for use and fails to come on at this time, or stays
service life of 14 years. Contact your warnings, and he/she must also be on, or lights up when driving, contact 2
local Authorized Maserati Dealer provided with the "Owner's Manual". your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
when this period is near to expiration. immediately.
The electronic control unit
In the event of a collision with activates the pretensioners Drive with both hands on the
consequent airbag inflation, and front/lateral airbags steering wheel rim, so that if
contact your local Authorized based on different criteria, according the airbag inflates it can do so
Maserati Dealer for replacement of the to the type of collision. The fact that freely, without encountering obstacles
entire safety system, electronic control one or more systems do not activate is which can cause serious injuries. Do
unit, seat belts, pretensioners, and to not indicative of a system not drive with your body curved
have the vehicle’s electrical system malfunction. forwards but keep the seatback
checked. upright, with your back fully against
it.
All testing, repairs and
replacements of the airbag Do not apply stickers or other
system must be done by an objects to the steering wheel
Authorized Maserati Dealer. or the passenger’s airbag
E compartment.

Do not travel with objects in


your lap, in front of your chest
or especially with a pipe,
pencil or other objects held in your
mouth. In the event of a collision, the
deployment of the airbag could result
in serious injury.
Front and side airbags 41
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 42 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Do not cover the front If interventions are carried out


seatbacks with clothing or on the electrical system
covers. incorrectly, the airbag could
be activated, thereby causing injuries
Note that with the ignition to anyone in the vicinity.
key inserted and turned to the
MAR (ON) position, even with The airbags do not replace the
the engine switched off, the airbags seat belts but act as a
2 can inflate even if the vehicle is supplementary restraint
stationary, if it is struck by another system. Moreover, in the event of
vehicle. Therefore, even with the head-on collisions at low speed, side
vehicle stationary, children must be impacts, rear impacts or roll-overs, the
secured by the specific child restraint passengers are protected by the seat
systems installed on the passenger belts only, that must always be
seat. On the other hand, the airbags fastened.
will not inflate in the event of
collisions with the vehicle stationary Do not wash the seats with
and the key removed from the ignition water or pressurized steam.
lock; failure of the airbags to inflate in
these circumstances is not indicative of Do not hang rigid objects onto
a system malfunction. the clothing hooks or onto the
handholds.
If the vehicle has been the
object of theft or attempted
theft, if it has been vandalized
or involved in flooding, contact your
local Authorized Maserati Dealer to
have the airbag system checked.

42 Front and side airbags


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 43 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

MSP System Activation WARNING: In the event of a fault with


the MSP disabled, the vehicle will react
The MSP system is activated
as if it were not equipped with this
The vehicle is equipped with the MSP automatically every time the engine is
system: have the system checked by
(Maserati Stability Program) yaw started, and it can be disengaged by
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
prevention monitoring system, pressing button A for approx. 2
as soon as possible.
encompassing all of the vehicle's seconds. Press button A again to
control systems: ABS, EBD, ASR and reactivate the system.
WARNING: Make sure that the ignition
MSR. The system is fitted with a unit The dark yellow warning light on
that is designed to predict the vehicle's the instrument panel flashes during all
key is turned to STOP if you have to 2
tow the vehicle with 2 wheels raised
behavior accurately. The system is the activation phases.
off the ground. Otherwise, with the
designed to detect whether the driver MSP switched on, the respective
is about to lose control of the vehicle. Fault indicators control unit will store a malfunction,
In this case, it can activate the brake In the event of a fault, the system is resulting in the illumination of the
calipers individually and the engine automatically disabled and cannot be warning lights on the instrument
control, in order to create a torque reactivated. This condition is signalled, panel and on the display: this requires
sufficient to resist the vehicle's yawing while driving, by the amber warning the intervention of your local
movement. light that comes on both on the Authorized Maserati Dealer to restore
instrument panel and on the multi- the system.
function display. On the latter, the
warning light is accompanied by the WARNING: In low- and medium-grip
message “MSP failure go to dealer”. conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
When the engine is started, the system etc.) it is advisable not to activate
malfunction is indicated by the SPORT mode, even with the MSP
illumination of the warning light . enabled.

WARNING: Driving on parabolic curves


will deactivate the system.

MSP System 43
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 44 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

ASR system (electronic The ASR system works together with MSR function (engine braking
the electronic suspension control torque adjustment)
anti-skid device) system: under normal conditions The MSR system is also designed to
(SPORT mode off), stability in low and control the engine braking torque
The ASR system is designed to help medium grip conditions has priority, when the accelerator pedal is released
prevent skidding of the driving wheels while with SPORT mode active, the under low grip conditions (e.g., snow,
during acceleration by means of the system favors traction, thereby ice, etc.): in these conditions, in fact,
engine control unit (spark advance optimizing vehicle's performance on the engine's high braking torque may
2 delay, engine throttle opening dry asphalt. cause instability of the vehicle.
reduction and fuel injection cut-out) The system, using the same sensors as
and of the rear brakes. Activation the ABS, detects the skidding arising
The ASR system enhances the vehicle The ASR system is automatically on one or both of the driving wheels
stability and helps improve active activated every time the engine is when the accelerator is released and
safety while driving, especially under started and can be deactivated by opens the motor driven throttle for the
the following conditions: pressing button A for about 2 seconds. engine supply system, thereby
– internal wheel skidding on curves Press button A again to reactivate the reducing the braking torque and
because of the dynamic load system. restoring the driving wheels maximum
variations or excessive acceleration The dark yellow warning light on grip conditions.
– excessive power transmitted to the the instrument panel flashes during all
wheels, also in relation to the road the activation phases. WARNING: The maximum deceleration
conditions that can be obtained with the engine
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy Fault indicators braking always depends on the tire
roadways In the event of a fault, the system is grip on the roadway. Snow or ice
automatically disabled and cannot be obviously reduce grip levels.
– loss of road grip on wet roads
(aquaplaning). reactivated. This condition is signalled,
while driving, by the amber warning
light, that comes on the multi-
function display, accompanied by the
message "ASR failure go to dealer".

44 ASR system (electronic anti-skid device)


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 45 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

ABS and EBD systems The failure will be indicated through Despite the fact that this
the illumination of the red warning device makes a considerable
light with the letters ABS on the contribution to safety, it is still
The vehicle is equipped with ABS (Anti-
instrument panel. essential to drive carefully, especially
lock Brake System) and EBD (Electronic when the road surface is wet, covered
In this case, we recommend you
Brake force Distribution) systems with snow or ice.
contact your local Authorized Maserati
which, by means of the ABS system
Dealer which, thanks to the self-
sensors and the ECU, are designed to The vehicle is equipped with
diagnostics system the vehicle is
improve the braking system’s
performance.
equipped with, should be able to an Electronic Brake force 2
quickly identify the problem. Distributor (EBD). The
In the event of an emergency stop or illumination of the warning light
braking on slippery surfaces (e.g., "BRAKE" with the engine running
The vehicles must be
snowy or icy roadways), the ABS, indicates a malfunction in the EBD
equipped only with wheels,
together with the standard braking system; in this case, sharp braking
tires and brake pads of the
system, is designed to allow the driver type and make approved by Maserati may cause an early locking of the rear
to apply maximum braking force S.p.A. for this model. wheels, and the vehicle may skid.
without causing the wheels to lock and Drive with the greatest care and have
consequently losing control of the the system immediately checked by
vehicle. the nearest Authorized Maserati
The system is based on an electronic Dealer.
control unit that processes the signals
coming from 4 sensors fitted on the 4
wheels.
When a wheel tends to lock, the sensor
warns the unit which, in turn, requests
an electro-hydraulic unit to intervene
by modulating the pressure exerted on
the brake; the driver will perceive a
“pulsation” on the brake pedal which
is completely normal.
In the event of a failure, the system will
be deactivated, but this will not affect
the efficiency of the standard braking
system.
ABS and EBD systems 45
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 46 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

The warning light usually If the low brake fluid warning System performance in terms
comes on when the engine is light “BRAKE” comes on, stop of active safety is not a reason
running to indicate a fault in the vehicle and check the for the driver to take
the ABS system only. In this case, the brake fluid level immediately. If the unnecessary risks. The driving style
braking system is designed to still be fluid level is below the minimum must always be suited to weather
efficient, but it will not make use of notch, top up with the recommended conditions, range of visibility and road
the anti-locking device. Under these fluid and contact your local traffic conditions and of course must
conditions, the EBD system efficiency Authorized Maserati Dealer comply with local traffic laws.
2 can also be reduced. Drive with the immediately to have the system
utmost care to avoid abrupt braking checked. Brake fluid leaks impair the The maximum obtainable
and consult your local Authorized operation of the entire braking deceleration is always
Maserati Dealer immediately. system. dependent on the grip
between tire and road. With snowy or
icy roadways, grip levels are obviously
reduced and the braking distance is
very high, even with the ABS system.

46 ABS and EBD systems


Cap2_usa.fm Page 47 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:20 PM

Tire pressure monitoring The system is equipped with a specific placard or tire inflation pressure label.
wiring that connects the antennas, the (If your vehicle has tires of a different
system control unit and the calibration button size than the size indicated on the
to the vehicle's electrical system. vehicle placard or tire inflation
The vehicle may be equipped with an pressure label, you should determine
optional system that monitors the tire The system warns the driver the proper tire inflation pressure for
pressure by means of special sensors that there is a drop in tire those tires.)
that are secured inside the wheel rims, pressure. This warning does
in position with the inflation valve. not excuse the driver from periodically As an added safety feature, your 2
These sensors transmit a signal that is checking the tires and from complying vehicle has been equipped with a tire
detected by the antennas fastened on with the prescribed tire pressure pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
the car body, behind the fenders, and levels. that illuminates a low tire pressure
connected to the ECU. warning light when one or more of
WARNING: The system stores the tire your tires is/are significantly under-
WARNING: The system can pressures as a reference rate, therefore inflated.
momentarily experience radio-electric tires must be inflated to the prescribed Accordingly, when the low tire
interference emitted by devices using pressure. pressure warning light illuminates, you
similar frequencies. should stop and check your tires as
Each tire, including the spare one (if soon as possible, and inflate them to
The ECU processes this information provided), should be checked monthly the proper pressure.
and, via the CAN line, transmits a series when cold and inflated to the inflation Driving on a significantly under-
of tire pressure data and system errors, pressure recommended by the vehicle inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
if any, to the on-board instrument manufacturer, as shown on the vehicle and can lead to tire failure. Under-
panel. inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
The signal transmitted by the ECU and tire tread life, and may affect
activates some icons on the display. vehicle handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a


substitute for proper tire maintenance,
A
and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain a correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure warning light.
Tire pressure monitoring system 47
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 48 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Your vehicle has also been equipped System calibration Viewing messages on the display
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to After replacing or inflating one or By pressing the specific "Mode"
signal when the system is not more tires, the system must be button B, (see page 77), the user can
operating properly. calibrated once again. access the information page showing
The TPMS malfunction indicator works To calibrate the system, keep button A, the pressure values for each tire.
in combination with the low tire located on the inside roof, pressed
pressure warning light. down for a time ranging between 4 When indication by event occurs, the
When the system detects a and 10 seconds. The system takes a malfunction is viewed in the place of
2 malfunction, the warning light will maximum of 20 minutes to complete the information on tire pressure levels.
flash for approximately one minute the calibration procedure with the The malfunction is displayed for a time
and then remain permanently vehicle in motion. equal to its entire display cycle. When
illuminated. A green symbol will appear on the the display cycle ends, the tire pressure
This sequence will continue upon display together with the message screen page becomes available again
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as "Calibration activated". and the multi-function symbol
the malfunction exists. If the user recalls the information page indicating the malfunction is displayed
When the malfunction indicator is showing the pressure levels of each in the specific area until the
illuminated, the system may not be tire, dashes “–.–” will be viewed in the malfunction is rectified.
able to detect or signal low tire place of the values.
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction warning light after
replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle, to ensure that the
B
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.

48 Tire pressure monitoring system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 49 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Normal conditions Low pressure The system may not know which wheel
By pressing the specific button for When the instrument panel receives a is originating the malfunction
quick information display ("Mode" message from the tire pressure ECU indication and therefore is not capable
button pressed briefly), the user can indicating that one or more tires have of indicating the wheel involved. In
access the information page (screen pressure levels below the control this case, screen page 3 will be
page 1), which displays the pressure threshold, screen page 2 is displayed displayed for 10 seconds.
levels for each tire. for 10 seconds, after which the system The display sequence follows the usual
will display the screen page previously logic of the malfunction previously
active. described. 2
When the key is subsequently turned
back to ON or when the MODE button
is pressed, if the malfunction persists
the display will show screen page 2
once again.

1 2 3

Tire pressure monitoring system 49


Cap2_usa.fm Page 50 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 3:14 PM

Tire punctures The system may not know what wheel “Run Flat” tire puncture
When the instrument panel receives a is originating the malfunction and If the vehicle is equipped with Run Flat
signal from the tire pressure ECU therefore is not capable of indicating tires, in the event of a tire puncture,
indicating that the pressure level of the wheel involved. As a consequence, the relative warning light comes on
one or more tires is below the alarm in addition to the warning light and the pages 6 are alternately
threshold, the warning light will permanently illuminated on the displayed for 10 seconds. At the end of
permanently illuminate on the instrument panel, the display will show the display cycle, the system will show
instrument panel and screen pages 4 screen page 5. The display strategy of the previously active page with the
2 will alternate on the display for 20 this screen page follows the same logic symbol positioned in area G of the
seconds. Every time the key is applied for screen page 4, previously display (see page 76). The warning
subsequently turned back to ON, if the described. light on the instrument panel
malfunction persists the display will remains on.
show screen pages 4 for 20 seconds. The system calculates the residual tire
These screen pages will be displayed life in miles and repeats the display
until the situation is corrected and the cycle every 19 mi (30 km) of driving up
system is calibrated again as required to a maximum of 75 mi (120 km).
by the system.

4 5 6

50 Tire pressure monitoring system


Cap2_usa.fm Page 51 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 3:14 PM

During the "tire punctured" condition, If another tire is punctured, the system If the driver presses the MODE button
if more than 75 mi (120 km) are calculates (without displaying it) the with the "Escape" function during the
travelled or if the vehicle speed updated value of the km that can still "tire punctured" condition, but not in
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the pages 7 be driven, depending on the distance maximum speed conditions and with
or 8, respectively, are displayed. covered from the previous puncture, the tires still in a condition to continue
At the end of the tire life, the display and displays the pages 9 alternately. driving, the summary symbol will be
logic follows the procedure for normal displayed in the dedicated warning
tires. light area until the correct condition is
restored and after subsequent 2
calibration requested by the system.

7 8 9

Tire pressure monitoring system 51


Cap2_usa.fm Page 52 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 3:14 PM

It may occur that the system does not System not calibrated Tire pressure monitoring system
know which wheel is signaling the If the system has not been calibrated or failure
fault and it is hence unable to display Screen page 12 may appear in the
following a tire replacement, the
it: page 10 will be displayed for 10 warning light will flash on the following cases:
seconds. instrument panel for 90 seconds, and – malfunction in the ECU system/
The system calculates the residual tire the display will show screen page 11. wiring
life and repeats the display cycle every Subsequently, the screen page – no signal reception by one or more
19 mi (30 km) of driving up to a previously active is displayed once sensors due to malfunction,
2 maximum of 75 mi (120 km) and also again and the warning light breakage or dead battery;
controls the conditions of exceeding illuminates on the instrument panel
the maximum km travelled or – ECU malfunction.
permanently.
exceeding the speed limit. The display sequence follows the usual
The system can be calibrated by means
of the specific button (see page 47). logic of malfunctions. Therefore, after
The information page that shows the 10 seconds, the display will show the
pressure value for each tire cannot be screen page that was active before the
recalled by the user. malfunction occurred.

10 11 12

52 Tire pressure monitoring system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 53 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

In addition to screen page 12 being System temporarily not active System not active
displayed, the warning light ,
When one of the following conditions After Key-on, in the case that the
which is permanently illuminated on
occurs: system has been deactivated by means
the instrument panel, will flash for 90
• outside transmitter (frequency of the diagnosis tester, screen page 14
seconds, after which it will remain
interference); will be displayed for several seconds.
permanently on until the situation is
• excessively high temperature; In addition, the warning light ,
corrected. The information page that
• during the first calibration which is permanently illuminated on
shows the pressure value for each tire
procedure; the instrument panel, will flash for 90
cannot be recalled by the user.
screen page 13 will be displayed. seconds, after which it will remain 2
In addition, the warning light , permanently on until the situation is
Note: The TPMS malfunction indicator
which is permanently illuminated on corrected.
works in combination with the low tire
the instrument panel, will flash for 90 The information page that shows the
pressure warning light. When the
seconds, after which it will remain pressure value for each tire cannot be
system detects a malfunction, the
permanently on until the situation is recalled by the user.
warning light will flash for
corrected.
approximately 90 seconds and then
The information page that shows the
remain permanently illuminated. Once
pressure value for each tire cannot be
the system detects a failure, you must
recalled by the user.
go to the nearest Authorized Dealer to
correct the problem and deactivate the
malfunction warning light.

13 14

Tire pressure monitoring system 53


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 54 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Parking sensors If the vehicle is also equipped with frequency increases as the vehicle
front sensors, these may be activated approaches the obstacle.
by pressing button A; When the front The acoustic signals are emitted by two
To assist the driver during parking
sensors are active, the button buzzers, one under the dashboard (if
manoeuvres, the vehicle may come
illuminates with an amber colour. To the vehicle is equipped with front
equipped with four sensors housed in
deactivate the front sensors, press sensors) and one in proximity of the
the rear bumper and four sensors in
button A once again. When reverse luggage shelf (if the vehicle is
the front bumper (optionals in the
gear is disengaged, all the sensors equipped with rear sensors).
latter case).
2 During parking manoeuvres, the
remain active. The rear sensors remain When the obstacle is located at a
active for about 10 seconds or until a distance of less than 14 in (35 cm) from
parking sensors provide the driver with
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 Km/h) is the bumper, the beep is continuous.
information on the distance between
exceeded. The front sensors remain The warning beep stops immediately
obstacles found behind and in front of
active until a speed of about 6 mph if the distance between the vehicle and
the vehicle. The information about the
(10 Km/h) is exceeded. the obstacle increases.
obstacle distance is given to the driver
The tone cycle is constant if the
by means of a acoustic and visual
When the rear or front sensors are distance measured by the central
signals. The acoustic signals generated
activated, an acoustic signal (beep) sensors remains unaltered, while if this
by the system add to the driver’s field
warns the driver that the system is occurs with the lateral sensors, the
of vision, allowing him to avoid hitting
active. signal stops after approximately 7
any obstacles during manoeuvres.
When the sensors are activated, the seconds, to prevent for example
system begins to beep as soon as an continuous beeps in the event of
However, the driver remains
obstacle is detected, and the tone manoeuvres alongside walls.
responsible during parking
manoeuvres and in other
potentially dangerous situations. The
system has actually been designed
only as a supplementary aid during
parking manoeuvres, since it allows
the driver to detect obstacles outside
his field of vision.
A
The front and rear parking sensors are
automatically activated when the key
is turned to MAR, when reversing.

54 Parking sensors
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 55 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

The distance from the obstacles can Stop & Go function Cleaning the sensors
also be graphically shown on the
The vehicle is equipped with a Stop & When cleaning the sensors, take
instrument panel display by means of
Go function that can be activated special care not to scratch or damage
an image that shows the vehicle
through the Bose® Infotainment them; therefore, do not use dry, rough
surrounded by explanatory symbols of system. The Stop & Go function can be or hard cloths.
the distance (maximum/average/ enabled/ disabled by accessing the The sensors must be washed with clean
minimum) and the position (front/rear/ "Vehicle Options" menu, selecting the water, possibly with car shampoo
central/side) of the obstacle detected. "Front parking sensor" option, then added. In car-washes which use steam
The colour represents the distance, the Stop & Go parking option and jet or high pressure cleaning machines, 2
while the field represents the position. setting it to "ON". With the Stop & Go keep the nozzle at least 10 cm away
The green colour represents the function active, the front sensors will from the sensors.
maximum distance detected, the automatically be activated in all Should you need to repaint the
yellow colour the medium distance conditions where the vehicle speed bumper or in case of paint touch-ups in
and the red colour the minimum one. goes below 8 Km/h (5 mph). the sensor area, please contact
If the vehicle is equipped only with
exclusively the Maserati Service
rear sensors, the front sensors are not WARNING: The Stop & Go function is Network. Incorrect paint application
shown in the image. only available if the vehicle is could affect the parking sensor
If the vehicle is equipped with front equipped with front parking sensors. operation.
and rear sensors, the rear sensors are
not shown in the image if only the For the system to operate
front sensors are active. correctly the sensors
positioned on the bumper
must be kept clean (remove any mud,
dirt, snow or ice).

Parking sensors 55
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 56 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Sensor range In the event of an obstacle located in a


The sensors allow the system to central area, this will be detected at
monitor the front and rear of the distances of less than 0.9 m at the front
vehicle; they are positioned so as to and 1.50 m at the rear, depending on
monitor the central and lateral zones the type of obstacle and its
at the front and at the rear of the dimensions.
vehicle. If the obstacle is located in a lateral
position, it will be detected at
2 distances of less than 0.6 m (2 feet).

56 Parking sensors
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 57 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Failure indicators During parking manoeuvres, The driver is fully responsible


always be extremely careful for parking and other
The system ECU checks all the
with obstacles that might be potentially dangerous
components every time reverse gear is
located above or below the sensors. In manoeuvres. During these
engaged.
fact, in certain circumstances, objects manoeuvres, always make sure there
In the event that the parking sensors
located near the rear of the vehicle are are no people (especially children) or
fail, the relative warning light
not detected by the system and animals in the manoeuvring area. The
illuminates on the display,
therefore could damage the vehicle or parking sensors must be considered an
accompanied by the message "Parking
Sensor Failure".
be damaged themselves. aid for the driver who, in any case, 2
must never take less care during
In the event of a failure signal, stop the
The signals transmitted by the potentially dangerous manoeuvres,
vehicle and turn the ignition key to
sensors can also be altered by even at low speeds.
Stop. Then try cleaning the sensors or
damage to the sensors or by
moving the vehicle away from any
dirt, snow or ice on the latter or even
possible ultrasound sources (e.g. by ultrasound systems (e.g. pneumatic
pneumatic truck brakes or pneumatic truck brakes or pneumatic hammers)
hammers) and rotate the ignition key in the vicinity.
to the MAR position. This way, if the
cause of the operating fault has been
removed, the system will start
functioning again automatically and
the failure buzzer will stop.
If however, the failure beep continues,
contact the Maserati Service Network
to have the system checked.

Parking sensors 57
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 58 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuel cut-out inertia switch After impact, if you smell fuel Resetting the switch
or note any leakage from the
Turn the ignition key to the STOP
fuel supply system, do not
The vehicle is equipped with a safety position.
reactivate the switch to help prevent
switch which is designed to intervene Check that there is no leakage from
any risk of fire.
in the event of a collision, cutting off the fuel system.
the fuel supply and consequently If no leaks are found, reset the inertia
The activation of the inertia switch
causing the engine to stop. It also switch which stops the fuel pump
results in all the doors and the luggage
prevents fuel leakage if the fuel lines operation, by pressing button A on the
2 are damaged during the accident.
compartment unlocking and the
switch.
internal dome lamp and the four
Activation of the safety switch is Turn the ignition key to the MAR (ON)
direction indicators switching on.
signaled by the illumination of the position, wait a few seconds and then
warning light on the display move it to the ACC. position.
The switch is positioned underneath Check that the warning light on
the front left-hand seat. the display is off.
Check once again that there are no
fuel leaks.

58 Fuel cut-out inertia switch


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 59 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuel cut-out inertia switch 59


Cap3_FOTO.fm Page 60 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:08 PM

60
Cap3_FOTO.fm Page 61 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:08 PM

Instruments and controls

Dashboard 62
Instrument panel 68
Indicators and warning lights 69
Instruments and gauges 75
Controls 81
Internal Equipment 87
3

61
Cap3_usa.fm Page 62 Wednesday, September 3, 2008 10:59 AM

Dashboard

33

34

3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 10 14 15 16 17 3 2 1

32 31

18

19

21
24

30 29 28 27 26 26 25 23 20 22

62 Dashboard
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 63 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

1) Air conditioning and heating system 13) Clock 26) Bose® Infotainment Controls
vents 14) Side buttons, to the right of the repeated on the steering wheel
2) Side windows vents Bose® Infotainment Display 27) Steering wheel height and depth
3) Speaker 15) Glove compartment opening adjustment control
4) Cruise Control, Direction indicators button 28) Engine compartment lid opening
control lever 16) Glove compartment lever
5) Instrument panel 17) Passenger’s airbag 29) Controls to the left of the steering
wheel
6) Driver’s airbag and horn 18) Bose® Infotainment
30) Controls on driver's door
7) Windshield/headlight wiper/washer 19) Air conditioning and heating
control lever system controls 31) External rear-view mirror controls
8) Controls to the right of the steering 20) Hazard button 32) Internal door opening handle 3
wheel 21) Automatic gearshift lever 33) Roof controls
9) Side buttons, to the left of the Bose® 22) Ashtray with cigarette lighter 34) Front dome lamp
Infotainment Display
23) Electric handbrake engagement/
10) Central air-conditioning and disengagement lever
heating system vents
24) Gear display
11) Upper air conditioning and heating
25) Ignition/steering lock switch
system vents
12) Sun radiation sensor

Dashboard 63
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 64 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Ref. 8 Controls on the right of the Ref. 9 and 14 Side buttons on the Ref. 26 Bose® Infotainment Controls
steering wheel Bose® Infotainment display repeated on the steering wheel
A - Instrument panel brightness A - SPORT mode button A - Increases the sound volume.
increase B - LOW-GRIP (ICE) mode button B - Decreases the sound volume.
B - Instrument panel brightness C - PARK OFF function button (see C - Button pressed briefly
decrease page 179) Voice command function
C - Trip MODE button and odometer D - MSP system deactivation button activation/deactivation.
reset. Button pressed at length
E - Door lock/unlock button
Repeats the last voice guidance
F - Sunshade raising/lowering button. message given by the navigator.
D - Button pressed briefly
3 Phone mode activation.
Places a call.
Accepts incoming call.
Ends call in progress.
Button pressed at length
Rejects incoming call.

A A
A
E
B B

C C
F
C B D
D

64 Dashboard
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 65 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

E - Button pressed briefly I - Broadcast Sources Mode: Radio Ref. 27 Steering wheel height and
Broadcast Sources Mode: searches frequency shift shifts the radio depth adjustment control
for the first tunable station with a frequency to the next station in
higher frequency; preset steps, starting from the
CD, Music Library mode: next track station currently tuned in.
selection. CD, MP3, Music Library mode:
Button pressed at length selects the next folder.
CD audio mode: track fast forward. J - Broadcast Sources Mode: shifts the
F - Button pressed briefly radio frequency to the previous
Broadcast Sources Mode: searches station in preset steps, starting
for the first tunable station with a from the station currently tuned in.
lower frequency; CD, MP3, Music Library mode: 3
CD, Music Library mode: goes to selects the previous folder.
the previous track if selected within K - Confirms the function, item or
the first 3 seconds of track playing, value selected.
otherwise the track is played again
from the beginning.
Button pressed at length
CD audio mode: track fast rewind.
G - Mode selection Broadcast, Digital
sources.
H - Mute function on/off.

E
I
F
K
G
J

Dashboard 65
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 66 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Ref. 29 Controls on the left of the Ref. 30 Controls on driver's door Rear console controls
steering wheel A - Rear power windows lock/unlock A - Door lock/unlock buttons
A - Light switch button B - Sunshade raising/lowering buttons
B - Fuel tank door opening button B - EASY ENTRY activation/
C - Luggage compartment lid opening deactivation
button C - Rear left-hand power window
D - Rear central headrest tilting button control
E - Front parking sensors activation. D - Rear right-hand power window
control
E - Front left-hand power window
3 control
F - Front right-hand power window
control
G - External rear-view mirror
adjustment control.

A C E G
A B

A B C D E
B D F
66 Dashboard
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 67 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rear vents Ref. 33 Roof controls Ref. 34 Controls on front dome lamp
A - Central vents on console A - Alarm system anti-lift function fixture
B - Side vents on pillars deactivation F - LH side light switch
B - Alarm system motion sensor G - Central light switch
deactivation
H - RH side light switch.
C - Tire pressure calibration
D - Hands-free microphone, voice
commands and AudioPilot® sensor
E - Sunroof opening/closing.

A B C
B A
F G H

E D
Dashboard 67
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 68 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Instrument panel 3) Display


4) Tachometer
1) Fuel level gauge and low fuel 5) Coolant temperature gauge and
warning light high temperature warning light
2) Speedometer

3 1 2 3 4 5

68 Instrument panel
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 69 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Indicators and warning Alternator condition WARNING: When the ignition key is
turned to the MAR (ON) position, if the
lights If there is a fault in the
warning light does not turn on or
recharging system.
if it turns on while driving, contact
When the battery is insufficiently
Rear fog lights your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
charged or overcharged (flashing).
as soon as possible.
When the rear fog lights are
turned on. Engine diagnosis system
failure (OBDII) (*) Automatic Gearbox
condition (*)
Fog lights Under normal conditions, this
Depending on the message
When the fog lights are warning light should switch on when
displayed it signals:
turned on. the ignition key is turned to the MAR
(ON) position, and should turn off 18 – gearbox condition 3
Position lights/low seconds after engine starts. This will If the failure permits, slowly drive to
beams show that the warning light is working the nearest Authorized Maserati
This switches on when the properly. Dealer.
position lights, low beams or parking If the warning light remains on or – gearbox oil temperature too high
lights are turned on. switches on while driving, it indicates
In this case, slow down until the
that there is a failure in the fuel supply/
temperature goes down to the normal
High beams ignition and emission control systems.
values for use (the warning light goes
The failure could cause high exhaust
When the high beams are off), see page 160.
emissions, loss of performance, poor
turned on or flashing. vehicle handling and high consumption
levels. In these conditions you can drive
Parking lights slowly without demanding engine
With the key removed, this performance or high speeds. Prolonged
indicates the parking lights use of the vehicle when the warning
are turned on. light is on can cause damages. For this
reason, you should contact your local
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
possible. The warning light will go out
if the problem disappears. The error will
be stored by the system in any case.
(*) Viewed on the display as well

Indicators and warning lights 69


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 70 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Low oil pressure (*) Low brake fluid warning Seat belts (*)
Under normal conditions, the light (*) It illuminates when the driver
warning light should come on It illuminates when the brake seat belt is not fastened or
when the ignition key is turned to the fluid level goes below the minimum improperly fastened. A buzzer is also
MAR (ON) position and go off as soon level. If accompanied by a specific activated for approx. 8 seconds when
as the engine is started. message, it indicates an EBD system the warning light is on.
If the warning light remains on or failure. In this case, do not apply the
turns on while driving, this indicates brakes suddenly, since this may cause Airbag/pre-tensioner
low engine oil pressure. In this case, an early locking of the rear wheels. failure (*)
turn the engine off immediately and Drive with the greatest care and have This turns on to indicate that
carry out the necessary checks. the system immediately checked by the the pre-tensioner and/or airbag system
3 If the problem persists, contact your nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer. is/are not working properly.
local Authorized Maserati Dealer.
If it flashes, it indicates a failure of the If the warning light comes on Turning the key to MAR (ON),
engine oil pressure sensor. while driving, check the brake the light comes on but it
fluid level immediately. If the should go out after a few
Tire pressure (*) fluid level is below the minimum level seconds with the engine running.
there could be a leakage in the circuit:
This warning light is
in this case, contact your local If the warning light stays on
connected to the tire pressure
Authorized Maserati Dealer before or if it does not come on, or if
monitoring system.
continuing your trip. it comes on while driving,
In normal conditions, the warning
light should illuminate when the stop immediately and consult your
ignition key is turned to MAR (ON) and
Defective ABS system (*) local Authorized Maserati Dealer.
should go off as soon as the engine is It illuminates when the ABS
started. If the warning light remains on system is not functioning.
or illuminates while driving, it The standard braking system remains
indicates a too low inflation pressure operational, but it is advisable to
of one or more tires. contact your Authorized Maserati
Dealer as soon as possible.

(*) Viewed on the display as well

70 Indicators and warning lights


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 71 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Maserati CODE (*) release the parking brake (see Left-hand direction
The warning light illuminates page 179). indicators
when the vehicle protection – Excessive temperature. This comes on when the left-
system is faulty if the vehicle has been stationary (key hand direction indicators or the hazard
to STOP) for about 15 minutes without lights are turned on.
Brake pads worn (*) using the parking brake, and the
This illuminates when the warning light illuminates again after
brake pads have reached restarting the engine, slowly drive to
their wear limit. the nearest Authorized Maserati
Contact your local Authorized Dealer.
Maserati Dealer. – Parking brake system overhaul
3
The EPB system must be serviced and
Handbrake engaged maintained only by an Authorized
The warning light comes on Maserati Dealer if any system
when the handbrake is malfunctions need to be corrected.
operated.
MSP system failure (*)
Parking brake failure (*) It indicates a malfunction or
Depending on the message the deactivation of the MSP
displayed, it signals the system.
following EPB system failures: When flashing, it indicates that the
– Parking brake failure. MSP system has activated.
slowly drive to the nearest Authorized Right-hand direction
Maserati Dealer and remember that indicators
the electric parking brake is not
functioning. This comes on when the right-
If the brake failure is accompanied by hand direction indicators or the hazard
the message "EPB fault only manual lights are turned on.
EPB release possible: see handbook",
the manual emergency deactivation
procedure must be performed to (*) Viewed on the display as well

Indicators and warning lights 71


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 72 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Warning lights on the display Stop lights failure could be damaged. Slowly drive to the
nearest Dealer.
This turns on in the case of a
Inertia switch, fuel cut- system failure or burning-out
out enabled If the light turns on
of the stop lights bulb.
This turns on when a collision permanently 3 times the
triggers the inertia switch, thus cutting engine will stop.
Twilight sensor failure
off the fuel supply. It will be possible to restart the vehicle
This turns on in the case of a only with a key-off - key-on cycle.
failure of the twilight sensor. Then slowly drive to the nearest
After impact, if you smell fuel
or note leakages from the fuel Authorized Maserati Dealer.
system, do not reactivate the
High catalyst
temperature
3 switch in order to help prevent the risk Maserati declines all
of fire. This warning light illuminates responsibility for whatever
if the engine runs irregularly with damage deriving from non
consequent high temperature in the compliance with the above mentioned
Windshield washer fluid
exhaust system. warnings.
This signals a low level of
washer fluid in the Power steering failure
IF THE WARNING LIGHT IS
windshield washer tank.
ACCOMPANIED BY THE This indicates a fault in the
MESSAGE “HIGH CATALYTIC power steering system.
Cruise Control CONV. TEMPERATURE SLOW DOWN”: Slowly drive to the nearest Authorized
This indicates that the Cruise the temperature in the catalysts is Maserati Dealer paying attention to
Control is active. excessively high. The driver must slow stiffening of the steering.
down immediately until the warning
Lights failure light turns off.
It illuminates in the case of a
system failure or if the IF THE MESSAGE “EXCESSIVE
position lights, direction indicator, rear CATALYTIC CONV.
fog and license plate lights are blown. TEMPERATURE DO NOT
PROCEED” APPEARS AFTER
DECELERATING: the temperature in
the catalysts has reached a dangerous
level and the catalytic converters

72 Indicators and warning lights


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 73 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Low engine oil level Parking sensors failure – Vehicle break-in detected.
Indicates that the engine oil This indicates a failure in the – Electronic key not recognized.
level is low; to check it see parking sensors system.
page 246 Doors and lids open
Shock absorber failure This indicates that the doors
High coolant When driving, it indicates a or lids are open or improperly
temperature malfunction in the suspension closed: the part not closed is
Acting in combination with system. highlighted in red.
the "Coolant thermometer", it
illuminates with the warning light on Finger-trap prevention WARNING: Before driving off, close
the instrument panel and indicates a system failure any open or not properly closed doors
too high coolant temperature. and lids. 3
This indicates a failure in the
In this condition, stop the vehicle and windows’ finger-trap prevention
have the cooling system checked by Ice hazard
system.
your Authorized Maserati Dealer. This switches on when the
Before and during activation outside temperature is
Adaptive Light Control of the power window, always approximately 37° F (3° C) or lower, in
system failure check that the passengers are order to indicate the risk of icy
It indicates a failure of the not exposed to the risk of injury both roadways. Under such conditions, drive
automatic headlight aiming system. by the moving window and by carefully and slow down as the grip of
personal objects dragged or hit by it. the tires will be reduced.
ASR system failure
Vehicle protection Do not activate the "SPORT"
It indicates that the ASR
systems mode in this situation.
system is faulty.
In the event of a failure, contact your It illuminates when the
local Authorized Maserati Dealer. system detects one of the following
malfunctions:
Rain sensor failure – Alarm system not available.
This indicates that the rain – Electronic key not detected.
sensor is faulty. – Have the vehicle protection system
Contact your local Authorized checked.
Maserati Dealer.
Indicators and warning lights 73
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 74 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Scheduled maintenance "Low grip" function


Depending on the ICE This indicates that the low
accompanying message, this grip function is active
indicates that service schedule
deadlines are either approaching or EPB automatic operation
due on that day. disabled
Upon reaching a deadline, contact It indicates that the EPB
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer. automatic activation/deactivation
function is disabled.
Auto gearbox setting
AUTO This indicates that the auto
3 gearbox feature is active.

“SPORT” setting
When the button that sets
the vehicle to the "SPORT"
mode is pressed.

WARNING: The "SPORT" mode


changes the vehicle driving features.

WARNING: SPORT mode should not be


activated if the road surface is in rough
or slippery.

WARNING: In low- and medium-grip


conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
etc.) it is advisable not to activate
SPORT mode, even with the MSP
enabled.

74 Indicators and warning lights


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 75 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Instruments and gauges Speedometer Tachometer


It indicates the vehicle speed. The It indicates the engine's r.p.m. Correct
Fuel level gauge gauge starts providing data when 2.5 driving allows the driver to achieve
mph (4 km/h) are exceeded. proper engine performance, without
The illumination of the warning light
the need of over-revving.
inside the gauge indicates that there
are approx. 4.7 U.S. gal (18 litres) of
fuel in the tank.

Instruments and gauges 75


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 76 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Coolant temperature gauge Display E - Total odometer,


It indicates the temperature of the Incorporated in the instrument panel, F - Trip odometer A, B or vehicle speed
coolant. If the needle indicates high it performs the following functions: repetition.
temperatures and at the same time the – it provides general information G - Other symbols that may be
warning light illuminates, stop the while driving; displayed in icon form
vehicle immediately and have the H - Outside temperature
– it signals any failures and warnings;
cooling system checked by your local
The user can interact with the system From the Options menu in the Bose®
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
by setting the parameters for the Infotainment system, the user can also
information that can be recalled. choose to have the Audio and
The screen page displayed following Navigator information repeated on
3 the initial check cycle, in normal the dashboard. For the relevant
working conditions, (standard screen procedures and instructions, see the
page) contains the following "Bose® Infotainment" manual.
information:
A - Date
B - Time
C - Gear engaged
D - Driving mode

B H

D G

E F

76 Instruments and gauges


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 77 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Controls Each of these has a 10-second timing, “+ “ and “-”


MODE after which the non-flashing By means of the “+ “(K) and “-” (L)
The screen page activation and setting information previously viewed is buttons, the user can adjust the
is controlled by pressing the MODE (J), restored. instrument panel brightness.
“+” (K) and “-” (L) buttons. Pressing the MODE button for more When the "Option Selection" screen
Pressing the MODE button briefly will than 2 seconds the user will select the page is viewed, these buttons can be
switch to the following screen pages in Trip Odometer information currently used to select, choosing between Trip
sequence: displayed, or the Trip Odometer A if Odometer A and Trip Odometer B, the
the speedometer repetition is active. information to be repeated on the
– Trip A This piece of information will flash for display. In fact, by selecting , trip A or
– Trip B 10 seconds, after which the non- trip B, with the MODE (J) button and
– Tire pressure flashing information previously then pressing buttons “+ “ and “-”, the 3
– Left-hand front seat comfort (*) viewed is restored. user will display the trip information
selected (flashing) alternately.
– Right-hand front seat comfort (*)
– Option Selection Trip Odometer reset
– RPM indicator In all these cases, and before the 10
– Standard. seconds are up, pressing the MODE (J)
button briefly (less than 2 seconds) will
result in the trip information relating
(*) if the vehicle is equipped with
to the flashing Odometer (A or B)
“Comfort Pack” or “Winter Pack”.
being reset.

Setting the date


The date can be set through the Bose®
Infotainment system, from the
K "System Options" menu (see the Bose®
Infotainment system manual).

J L

Instruments and gauges 77


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 78 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

TRIP screen page Tire pressure screen page – low pressure or puncture in front LH,
The Trip screen page is recalled by If the vehicle is equipped with the tire front RH tires or rear LH and rear RH
pressing the MODE (J) button. Each pressure monitoring system (optional), tires
TRIP screen page (A or B) is timed, i.e., pressing the MODE (J) button the user – low pressure or puncture in
it is displayed for a maximum of 10 will display information about the unidentified tire.
seconds, after which the screen "Tire Pressure". The system can be calibrated by
previously active is restored. This screen page is displayed for 10 pressing button M, on the front dome
When the TRIP A or TRIP B feature is seconds and, in normal conditions, it light fixture. The initialization of the
active, the following information is will appear as shown in figure 1 procedure is indicated on the display
viewed on the display: – furthermore, the system by the message “Calibration
– travelled distance (km - miles) acknowledges the following activated”.
3 conditions: For more information, please see the
– average fuel consumption (km/L –
mpg) – system temporarily not active (e.g., “Tire pressure monitoring system”
external radio interference) chapter on page 47.
– average travelling speed (km/h -
mph) – system not calibrated (e.g., a tire was
– trip time (hh:mm) replaced)
– fuel range (km - miles) – system failure
The unit of measurement can be set via – system not active (if it is disabled by
the "System Options" menu of the the diagnostics system)
Bose® Infotainment system.

78 Instruments and gauges


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 79 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Comfort screen page P - Ventilation level Option Selection Screen Page


If the vehicle is equipped with either Q - Massage system activation/ Briefly press the MODE button to
the “Winter Pack” or the “Comfort deactivation display the screen page and select the
Pack” on the front seats, repeatedly R - Self-adaptive system activation/ desired value among the following
press the MODE button to display the deactivation ones:
screen pages showing the system – TRIP A distance
In both cases, the screen pages shown
operating mode for each individual
in Figures 2 and 3 are displayed for 10 – TRIP B distance
seat.
seconds. – Current speed repetition
If the vehicle is equipped with “Winter
Pack”, the following seat information – Passenger compartment
is shown: temperature on the driver’s side.
N - Seat indication which will be displayed in area F, 3
O - Heating level within the standard screen page
If the vehicle is equipped with (see page 76).
“Comfort Pack”, the following seat The screen page, shown in Fig. 4,
information is shown: remains displayed for 10 seconds.
N - Seat indication The options listed can be selected by
pressing the “+” and “-“ buttons and
O - Heating level
are confirmed by briefly pressing the
MODE button or simply not
performing any operation for 10
seconds.

N 2 N 3 4

O O P

Q
R

Instruments and gauges 79


Cap3_usa.fm Page 80 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 8:51 AM

RPM indicator screen page If the Audio or Navigation data Bose® Infotainment
The "RPM Indicator" screen page repetition option is active on the By accessing the "System Options" and
allows the user to display, within the Bose® Infotainment, when the user "Vehicle Options" modes, the user can
sets the virtual RPM indicator this shall
standard screen, also a virtual RPM set the vehicle functions.
not be activated until the repetition
gauge. The parameters that can be set are the
function is disabled (see page 123 of
The screen page can be recalled by following:
the Bose® Infotainment).
pressing the MODE button repeatedly.
The options available, which can be System Options
selected by pressing the buttons + and - Brightness Display
-, are the following: - Deactivate Display
– ON (display enabled); - Set Time and Date
3 - Time format
– OFF (display disabled). - Date format
This function is activated if the user - Language
presses the MODE button to confirm - Temperature Display
this option. - Distance Display
- Tire Pressure Display
- Delayed Accessory
- Reset System Options

Vehicle Options
- Buzzer volume
- Audio Repetition
- Phone Repetition
5 - Navigation Repetition
- Speed Door Lock
- Unlock Only Driver Door
- Dusk Light Sensitivity
- Front parking sensor
- Easy entry / exit
- Luggage compartment lid opening
- Day running lights

80 Instruments and gauges


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 81 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Controls Hazard warning lights Controls on the left of the


Press button B to turn on the hazard steering wheel
warning lights. Their operation is Front fog lights
Horn
independent of the ignition key Press button C to turn on the front fog
Pressing the horn symbol A, the horn is
position. Press the button again to turn lights. They only work with the
activated.
them off. position lights or low beams on. The
When these lights are on, the direction LED on the button illuminates when
indicators, the related warning lights the lights are on.
on the instrument panel and the
button are flashing. Rear fog lights
Press button D to turn on the rear fog
WARNING: When the hazard warning lights. They only work with the front 3
lights are activated, the direction fog lights or low beams on. The LED on
control is disabled. the pushbutton illuminates when the
lights are on.

Do not use the rear fog lights


in normal visibility conditions
to avoid dazzling vehicles
behind.

B
C D

Controls 81
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 82 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Opening the luggage compartment Opening the fuel tank door Rear central headrest tilting
Press button E to open the luggage Press button F to open the fuel tank Press button G to tilt the rear central
compartment lid. door on the rear left-hand side of the headrest. The headrest can be then
This can be operated only with the vehicle. repositioned manually.
ignition key removed or turned to This button can be operated only when
STOP and ACC. the ignition key is removed or in the Before tilting the headrest,
Vehicles are also equipped with a lever STOP position. always check that the
inside the luggage compartment, passengers are not exposed to
which permits opening from the the risk of injury both by the moving
inside. headrest and by personal objects hit
by it.
3

E F G

82 Controls
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 83 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Deactivating the front parking Controls on the right of the Mode


sensors steering wheel Pressing button L will select the screen
The front parking sensors can be Instrument panel display controls (see pages to be viewed on the instrument
deactivated by pressing button H. page 77). panel display.
When these sensors are turned off, the
LED on the button illuminates. To Setting the instruments and gauges
reactivate the sensors, press button H brightness
again. With the external lights turned on,
press button J or K to increase or
decrease the brightness for the
instruments and gauges.
3

L
H

Controls 83
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 84 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Side buttons on the Bose® Sunshade movement WARNING: Before activating the
Infotainment Press button O to raise the sunshade sunshade, make sure that there are no
and button P to lower it. objects that may interfere with its
Lock set release and locking
The buttons are found both on the travel.
Buttons M and N, on the front and rear
dashboards, control the locking and front and on the rear dashboard.
SPORT setting
unlocking of the lock sets respectively. Press button Q to select SPORT mode,
WARNING: If the sunshade guide
needs to be cleaned with solvents, it which activates the "Automatic
must then be greased in the area Gearbox" and sets the suspension and
where the sunshade slides using Teflon traction control for sports-style
based grease. driving.
3 Please notice that selecting the SPORT
WARNING: If, within a time period of mode will decrease driving comfort.
25 seconds, the sunshade is raised and Especially in city traffic and on uneven
lowered at least 4 times, the relative road surfaces.
control will disable them for 30
seconds. Before disabling the
sunshade, the system will complete the
movement in progress. The last
movement accepted will be opposite
to the starting movement.

Q
M

O
N

84 Controls
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 85 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Low grip PARK OFF MSP System


This mode can be used on particularly This function allows the user to The MSP system is designed to activate
slippery road surfaces (e.g., rain, snow, deactivate automatic engagement of automatically every time the engine is
ice) to help provide increased road the electric parking brake (EPB) (see started.
grip. To activate/deactivate this mode, page 179). Press the button S to It is possible to deactivate or reactivate
press button R. deactivate/reactivate the function. the system while driving by pressing
When the function is active, the word button T. To avoid deactivating the
ICE lights up on the display (see system inadvertently, the button must
chapter “Other system functions” on be pressed for about 2 seconds to turn
page 157). the MSP system off.
When the system is deactivated, the
amber warning light on the 3
instrument panel illuminates (see
chapter “MSP System” on page 43).

S
R

Controls 85
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 86 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Roof controls Tire calibration button


Deactivating the alarm system To calibrate the system, with the
motion sensors ignition key in position MAR (ON),
Pressing button U will deactivate the press button W for a time ranging
alarm motion sensing system. When from 4 to 10 seconds.
this function is deactivated, the LED on The system will take a maximum of 20
the button will flash for 3 seconds and minutes to complete the calibration
then will turn off. procedure with the vehicle in motion.
The detected situation will then be
Deactivating the anti-lift alarm shown on the display.
system For further information, see the “Tire
3 Pressing button V will deactivate the pressure monitoring system” on
anti-lift alarm system. When this page 47.
function is deactivated, the LED on the
button will flash for 3 seconds and
then turn off.

V U W

86 Controls
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 87 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Internal Equipment Improper use of the sunroof Opening and closing


can however be dangerous, The selector switch A controls all the
even with the finger-trap roof's movements.
Sunroof prevention system. Before and during There are 6 positions to open the
The sunroof is electrically controlled the sunroof operation, always make sliding roof and 3 three positions for
and can only be operated with the sure that passengers are not exposed the tilted opening.
ignition key in the MAR (ON) position. to the risk of injuries caused both by When the selector switch position has
It can slide and be raised at the rear the moving roof and by personal been chosen, the sunroof moves until
(tilting). objects dragged or hit by the sunroof it stops automatically in the position
The sunroof is equipped with a finger- itself. When you exit the vehicle, chosen.
trap prevention system designed to always remove the ignition key to Upon opening the sunroof, a front flap
control sliding when the roof is being avoid that the sunroof, if operated rises automatically in order to deflect 3
closed or tilted. If an obstacle inadvertently, becomes a danger for the air flow.
interferes with the roof travel during passengers remaining onboard.
the closing stage, the sunroof stops WARNING: If the guide needs to be
and reverses its travel a short way back. WARNING: Do not open the sunroof if cleaned with solvents, the
there is ice on it: risk of damage. mechanisms, Bowden cables and
WARNING: In the event of rain, always sliding parts, such as the water channel
close the sunroof to prevent the water slide, must be then greased.
from staining the fabric/leather
upholstery.

A
Internal Equipment 87
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 88 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Front dome light Opening one or more doors, the front Rear dome light
The dome light includes a central light and rear dome lights will turn on for The dome light includes a central light
and two reading lights. The central approx. 3 minutes. If the door is closed and two reading lights. The central
light, which turns on automatically before this time has elapsed, the lights light, which turns on automatically
when one of the doors is opened and will switch off after about 10 seconds. when one of the doors is opened and
turns off following the door closing Upon removing the key from the turns off following the door closing
(timed switching off) may be switched switch and activating the centralized (timed switching off) may be switched
on manually by pressing button B. door lock with the remote control, the on manually by pressing button E.
The reading lights are controlled by dome lamps turn on for about 10 The reading lights are controlled by
the respective buttons C. seconds. the respective buttons F.
If they are turned on pressing the In the event of a collision causing the If they are turned on pressing the
3 button, both the central and reading inertia switch to turn on, the dome button, the reading light will remain
lights will remain on for about 15 lights turn on automatically for on for about 15 minutes after turning
minutes after turning the engine off, approx. 15 minutes. the engine off, and then will turn off.
and then will turn off. When the exterior lights are turned on,
When the exterior lights are turned on, the two night LEDs G illuminate.
the two night LEDs D illuminate.

D B D

C
G F E F G

88 Internal Equipment
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 89 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

HomeLink Important Safety Precautions General Information


This system allows you to control Always refer to the operating If you are training HomeLink to
automatic gate and garage door instructions and safety information operate a garage door or gate, it is
opening devices, as well as lighting or that came with your garage door recommended that you unplug the
alarm systems from inside the vehicle. opener or other equipment you intend motor for that device during training.
Programmable directly on the to operate with the HomeLink Repeatedly pressing the remote
transmitting station by means of the Universal Transceiver. If you do not control button could burn out the
original remote controls for the have this information, you should motor.
devices to be controlled, it adapts to contact the manufacturer of the HomeLink stores the code in a
the existing systems. equipment. permanent memory. There should be
The control and programming panel is no need to retrain HomeLink if your
composed of three keys: H, I, J and a While training or using HomeLink, car’s battery goes dead or is 3
LED K. make sure you have a clear view of the disconnected.
garage door or gate, and that no one If your garage door opener was
Customer Assistance will be injured by its movement. manufactured before April 1982, you
If you have problems with training the may not be able to program HomeLink
HomeLink Universal Transceiver, or to operate it. Garage door openers
would like information on home manufactured before that date do not
products that can be operated by the have a safety feature that causes them
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On the to stop and reverse if an obstacle is
Internet, go to www.Homelink.com. detected during closing, increasing the
risk of injury. If you have questions, call
(800) 355-3515.

H I J

Internal Equipment 89
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 90 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Programming Use Programming for devices controlled


– Press and hold down the keys H and – When the signal of the device to be by rolling code
J; activated reaches its operating – Locate the specific setting key by
– after about 20 seconds, the LED K range, press the dedicated consulting the user manual of the
starts flashing; HomeLink key. system to be controlled. This is
– The LED K remains on while the normally located on the motor
– release the keys;
signal is being transmitted. which drives the device.
– hold the remote control for the
The devices controlled via the – Press the key and, in normal
device to be controlled close to the
HomeLink function can, in any case, conditions, a LED will come on.
HomeLink control panel (12 in);
still be activated from the original
– simultaneously press and hold down WARNING: Normally, after this
remote controls.
3 the key of the hand-held remote
Should the programmed HomeLink operation you have 30 seconds to start
control and one of the three the next one.
not activate the system to be
HomeLink keys H, I or J; – Briefly press the HomeLink key you
controlled, it may be that it is
– successful programming is signaled controlled by a remote control with a have chosen to control the device (H,
by the LED K flashing faster rolling code. I, J).
– release the keys. A rolling activation code can be – Press it a second time; when it is
To program the other keys, repeat the recognized in the following ways: released the operation should be
operations skipping the first three – consulting the instruction manual completed. For some types of
steps. provided with the device to be motors, the key might have to be
controlled; pressed a third time.
– despite the HomeLink programming
procedure having been carried out
correctly, the HomeLink function
does not activate the device;
– holding the dedicated HomeLink key
pressed down, the LED K briefly
flashes fast and then stays on for 2
seconds; this sequence is repeated
for about 20 seconds.

90 Internal Equipment
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 91 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Reprogramming a single key Deleting the programmed keys As required by the FCC:
If you want to program activation of a Unlike programming which is done for This device complies with Part 15 of the
new system on an already used each individual key, deletion is done FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
HomeLink key, proceed as follows: for all three keys simultaneously. following two conditions: (1) This
– press and hold down the HomeLink To delete, proceed as follows: device may not cause harmful
key selected; – press and hold down the keys H and interference, and (2) this device must
J; accept any interference received,
– after about 20 seconds, the LED K
including interference that may cause
starts flashing; keep the key pressed – after about 20 seconds, the LED K
undesired operation.
down; starts flashing;
– hold the original remote control of – release the keys. Changes or modifications not expressly
the device to be controlled close to approved by the party responsible for 3
the HomeLink control panel (12 in); WARNING: It is advisable to carry out compliance could void the user’s
– press and hold down the original the HomeLink deletion procedure authority to operate the equipment.
remote control key; when selling the vehicle.
– successful programming is signaled This device complies with Industry
by the LED K flashing faster; Canada Standard RSS-210.
– release both keys. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
The system previously programmed on
cause interference, and (2) this device
HomeLink has thus been replaced with
must accept any interference that may
the new programming and is ready to
cause undesired operation of the
be used.
device.
This operation has no impact on the
other HomeLink keys.

Internal Equipment 91
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 92 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Sun visors Clock Rear window sunshade


They can be folded to the front and to The clock is adjusted automatically by The electrical sunshade works with the
the side of the vehicle. To move the setting the time with the Bose® ignition key in the MAR (ON) position.
visor to the sides, lower and release it Infotainment. The control buttons are located both
from the catch L. The clock illuminates when the on the front and on the rear
By lowering the visor on the external lights are turned on. dashboard.
passenger's side you can access the
courtesy mirror with incorporated WARNING: Before activating the
light; the light turns on automatically sunshade, make sure that there are no
(with the ignition key in the MAR (ON) objects that may interfere with its
position) raising the mirror protective travel.
3 cover. Before raising the visor, close the
mirror cover.

92 Internal Equipment
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 93 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Press button M to raise the sunshade Rear door sunshades (optional) Front ashtray and cigarette
and button N to lower it.
Housed on the rear doors, they retract lighter
automatically. To pull out the They are found on the central console,
WARNING: If the sunshade guide hidden by a cover. To open the cover,
sunshade, pull on the grip O and latch
needs to be cleaned with solvents, it slide it forward.
it into the catches P located on the top
must then be greased in the area Pressing the lighter Q downwards
edge of the door.
where the sunshade slides using Teflon
activates the cigarette lighter. After
based grease.
about 20 seconds, this returns
automatically to the initial position
WARNING: If the sunshade is moved up
and is ready for use.
and down at least 4 times within a time
Remove the tray in order to clean the
period of 25 seconds, the system
ashtray. 3
deactivates for 30 seconds. Before
disabling the sunshade, the system will
WARNING: Always make sure that the
complete the movement in progress.
cigarette lighter has been switched off.
The last movement performed will be
opposite to the starting movement.
The cigarette lighter reaches
high temperatures. Handle it
carefully and do not allow
children to use it: risk of fire and
burns!

P
Q
P
M N O

Internal Equipment 93
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 94 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rear ashtray Beverage holder on center Glove compartment


It is located on the rear central console, console Positioned in the lower part of the
hidden by a cover. To open the cover, This is found behind the gearbox lever. dashboard, on the passenger side, it
hold and pull it from the protruding can be opened pressing button S. The
part. button only works with the ignition
Pressing the lighter R downwards key turned to MAR (ON) and for about
activates the cigarette lighter. After 10 minutes after having extracted the
about 20 seconds, this returns key or rotated it to the STOP position.
automatically to the initial position The compartment is lit by a courtesy
and is ready for use. light when it is open.
Remove the tray in order to clean the To help ensure passenger
3 ashtray. safety, the compartment must
always remain closed while
driving.
If the button controlled opening is
faulty, the compartment can be
opened by pulling the emergency
cable behind the compartment itself.
WARNING: Do not place objects
weighing over 22 lb (10 kg) in the
glove compartment.

94 Internal Equipment
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 95 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Temperature controlled Map pockets Handholds


beverage holder The front seats are fitted with map Usually laying in a horizontal position,
The front armrest houses a beverage pockets located on the rear of the the handhold U can rotate until
holder into which air is sent directly seatbacks. reaching a vertical position. A return
from the air conditioning/heating spring automatically repositions the
system. WARNING: Do not put heavy or sharp handhold in the horizontal position.
To access the compartment, pull the objects in the map pockets. The rear handholds also include a
armrest holding it from the handgrip. clothing hook, V.
To activate the air-conditioning/
heating ventilation inside the
compartment, move control T
upwards. To stop it, move control T 3
downwards.

WARNING: The temperature of the air


inside the beverage holder is the same
as that coming out from the air
conditioning/heating vents, it
therefore depends on the temperature
set via the relative control panel.

V U

Internal Equipment 95
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 96 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Tables (optional) WARNING: As the table is not


equipped with beverage holders, do
They are installed on the back of the
not place open drink containers on the
front seats.
tables while driving, as the
Opening: lift the table W until the
surrounding upholstery could be
supporting mechanism clicks in place.
stained or damaged if they fall over.
When one or more tables are
Closing: press the support bracket X to
open, passengers traveling in
release the mechanism and then lower
the rear seats must fasten
the table W.
their seat belts as indicated on the
table.
3 When you are not using the
table W, you should close it to
When traveling with one or
prevent passengers sitting in
more child seats fitted on the
the rear seats from being hit by its
rear seat of the vehicle, the
edges and corners.
tables must be closed.

When closing the table always


guide it down: risk of
crushing.

96 Internal Equipment
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 97 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Internal Equipment 97
Cap4_FOTO.fm Page 98 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:11 PM

98
Cap4_FOTO.fm Page 99 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:11 PM

Before you drive

Doors 100
Power windows 104
Engine compartment lid 106
Luggage compartment 107
Fuel tank door 109
Keys 110
Ignition switch 113
Electronic alarm system 114 4
Front seats 118
Rear seats 122
Rear-view mirrors 125
Steering wheel 127
External lights and direction indicators 128
Windshield wiper/washer and headlight washers 132
Bose® Infotainment 134
Air conditioning and heating system 138
Bose® Surround Sound 145

99
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 100 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Doors and rear doors. Otherwise, if the doors When the alarm system is activated
are locked, you must release them by and the doors are locked, the LEDs on
turning the key in the lock to open the doors flash.
Before opening a door, ensure
them, then press button D. The remote control allows you to
the maneuver can be
On the front door panels, in a position operate the centralized opening of all
performed safely.
which is visible from the outside, there the doors or only the driver’s door
is a dual-color (green/red) LED E which depending on the setting in the Bose®
Opening doors from the outside indicates the locks’ status (locked/ Infotainment.
Switch off the alarm and the unlocked). The red LED lights up for 3 If, when the doors are closed from
centralized locking system by pressing seconds after the locks are engaged outside, one or more of the doors and/
button A on the radio control (see and the green LED for the same or the luggage compartment lid are
chapter “Electronic alarm system”, amount of time when they are not properly closed, the direction
page 114) or insert and turn the key in released. indicators flash quickly for a few
the lock on one of the front doors. To seconds.
4 open the door, press button C on the WARNING: The door LEDs remain lit
inside of each handle. for approximately 3 seconds and WARNING: The internal door lock/
The vehicle is equipped with power therefore, in normal conditions, the unlock buttons are disabled when the
latches which move the mechanical LEDs are turned off. doors are locked from the outside.
parts during door-opening maneuvers.
In the event of an emergency (e.g., WARNING: In the event that the inertia
dead battery or electric system failure) switch trips, the doors are electrically
to open the doors when the locks are unlocked and the vehicle can be
released, press button D for the front accessed by pressing button D.

D C
A E

100 Doors
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 101 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Opening from the inside WARNING: When the door is open, the Doors open warning lights
To open the front doors even if the door lock cannot be activated either If the doors and the engine/luggage
locks are engaged pull the interior electrically or mechanically. compartment lids are not closed
handle F. properly, it is signalled by the relative
To open the rear doors, the lock must WARNING: If the door is partially warning lights on the instrument
also be manually released by lifting the latched, do not attempt to close it by panel display illuminating,
door lock button G, located on both pushing it, but open and close it again. accompanied by the messages “Door
doors. open” or “Doors open”.
WARNING: When pulling the interior
WARNING: There is no warning light or handle on the driver’s door, either all
message on the panel to signal the the locks are released or only that of
door lock button position to the driver. the driver’s door, depending on the
settings of the Bose® Infotainment.
There are two buttons on the front
and rear consoles which control the 4
electric locking and unlocking of the
doors:
K – Door locking
L – Door unlocking

G
K
F
K L
L

Doors 101
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 102 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Child safety device WARNING: When pulling the interior Easy entry/exit system cut-out
This device is used to prevent the rear
handle F on the rear doors and device
noticing that the handle moves freely, This device is used to activate/
doors from being opened from the
do not exert excessive force on the deactivate the Easy entry/exit system.
inside.
handle as the child safety device is
It is enabled/disabled by inserting the Deactivation is signalled by the
enabled.
ignition key into device M and rotating illumination of the LED on button J.
it to the following positions:
The child safety device remains
1 – device disabled (unlocked);
enabled even when the central door
2 – device enabled (locked).
locking is activated.
When the device is enabled on
the relevant door, it cannot be
opened from the inside in any
condition.
4

J
1
2
M

102 Doors
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 103 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Automatic door locking over 10 If the centralized locking has Underdoor courtesy light
mph (16 km/h) been activated from the inside Each door panel is fitted, on the lower
Using the Bose® Infotainment system, and, following a collision, the side, with a courtesy light O to
the doors, engine and luggage inertia switch was unable to activate illuminate the area where passengers
compartment lids and fuel tank door the door release function due to loss enter/exit the vehicle.
can be set to lock automatically when of the battery or damage to it, it will
the vehicle speed exceeds 10 mph (16 not be possible to access the Gearshifting is always active
km/h). passenger compartment from outside. and may be performed even
To activate/deactivate this function, However, whether the doors can be when one or more doors, the
please see the "Bose® Infotainment" opened or not depends on the engine compartment lid or the
manual. condition they are in and, in fact, if a luggage compartment lid are open.
door is damaged it may be impossible Therefore, in these conditions, take
WARNING: If you need to have the to open it, even if the lock is not great care to avoid moving the
vehicle tested on a roller bench with engaged. In this case, attempt to open gearshift lever and accidentally
nobody onboard, you must verify, the other doors. engaging the gears. 4
through the Vehicle Options menu,
that the automatic door locking Door lock ECU initialization
feature - that is activated upon Every time the battery is connected or
exceeding 10 mph (16 Km/h) is a fuse replaced, to restore correct
disabled, or that a window is open, or operation, the system initialization
that you have an additional key left procedure must be performed. This
out of the vehicle. consists in a door lock/release cycle
effected using the door remote
Door release in the event of an control.
accident
In the event of a collision with Door open indicator
activation of the inertia switch, the Each door is provided with a reflector
door locks are automatically released N fitted on the lower side of the door
to allow rescuers to access the panel. N
passenger compartment from outside.

Doors 103
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 104 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Power windows Improper use of the power Operation in manual and


windows can nevertheless be automatic modes
dangerous, even if the vehicle The front and rear power windows can
Finger-trap prevention device is equipped with the finger-trap be operated both automatically
The system is designed to detect the prevention system. Before and during (opening and closing) and manually.
presence of an obstacle, during the activation of the power window, The operation mode is selected
window’s upwards stroke, always check that the passengers are according to the length of the power
consequently interrupting the not exposed to the risk of injury both window’s operation impulse.
upwards travel and reversing it by the moving window and by If the button is kept pressed down or
immediately. personal objects dragged or hit by it. pulled up, the automatic operation is
If the finger-trap prevention function When you get out of the vehicle, activated, upwards or downwards,
is activated 5 times within a minute, always remove the ignition key to respectively. The window stops when it
the system automatically enters the prevent the windows from reaches the stroke end or if the button
“recovery” mode, which is indicated by accidentally being activated posing a is pushed again.
4 the window moving upwards in a risk to passengers remaining onboard. A short impulse causes a small
jogging motion. To restore normal
movement of the window, which stops
operation, press the control once
when the button is released.
again or turn the key to the STOP
position and subsequently to the MAR
(ON) position.
If there are no system malfunctions the
window operation will return to
normal. If this is not the case, contact
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer.
When the system detects a fault, the
“ ” symbol appears on the
instrument panel display, accompanied
by a failure message.
It can only be operated with the
ignition key in the MAR (ON) position.

104 Power windows


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 105 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Controls Central opening/closing of the To activate the central opening of the


The armrest on the driver’s door is windows windows hold the button F on the
equipped with controls for operating The central opening/closing system for remote control down for more than 2
all of the power windows, while the the windows can be activated in the seconds after the doors have been
panels on the other doors house the following conditions: unlocked. The power windows are
control for the relative window only. operated until they are completely
– ignition key removed
A - opening/closing front left-hand opened or until the button is released.
– all doors must be properly closed.
window
To activate the central closing of the WARNING: Before activating the alarm
B - opening/closing front right-hand
windows, hold the button G on the system, check that all the windows and
window
remote control down for more than 2 the sunroof are closed to prevent
C - opening/closing rear left-hand seconds after the doors have been undesired triggering of the alarm.
window closed. The power windows are
D - opening/closing rear right-hand operated until they are completely Improper use of the power
window closed or until the button is released. windows can nevertheless be 4
E - disabling/enabling power window dangerous, even if the vehicle
controls on the rear doors. The WARNING: Before leaving the vehicle, is equipped with the finger-trap
controls are disabled when the LED it is advisable to check that the prevention system. Before and during
on the button is illuminated. windows and the sunroof are activation of the power window,
completely closed. always check that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of injury both
by the moving window and by
personal objects dragged or hit by it.
When you get out of the vehicle,
always remove the ignition key to
F G prevent the windows from
E C A accidentally being activated posing a
risk to passengers remaining onboard.

D B
Power windows 105
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 106 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Engine compartment lid To close the lid: lower it to about 8 in.


(20 cm) from the engine compartment
and let it drop; it will close
To open the engine compartment lid:
automatically.
pull lever A located on the lower left-
hand side of the dashboard.
Always check that the engine
compartment lid is properly
Disengage the safety device by lifting closed, to prevent it from
the lever B shown in the figure. opening while travelling.
Lift the lid: this operation is facilitated
by two gas struts. Gearshifting is always active
The lid positions itself at the maximum and may be performed even
opening position and does not require when one or more doors, the
support stays. engine compartment lid or the
4 luggage compartment lid are open.
Therefore, in these conditions, take
great care to avoid moving the
gearshift lever and so accidentally
engage gears.

106 Engine compartment lid


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 107 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Luggage compartment may be unlocked also using the door The struts are calibrated to help ensure
unlock control C, see page 124 of the proper operation with the weights
Bose® Infotainment manual. specified by the manufacturer.
The luggage compartment lid can be
If the lock is released, to open the Arbitrary additions of objects (spoilers,
opened from the inside or outside of
luggage compartment lid simply press parcel racks, etc.) can jeopardize
the vehicle. Button A, used to open the
the button under the license plate proper operation and safety in the use
lid from inside the passenger
lights molding. of the luggage compartment lid.
compartment, located to the left of
To prevent the controls being operated
the steering wheel; operation is only
accidentally while the vehicle is When using the luggage
possible with the ignition key removed
travelling, the luggage compartment compartment, never exceed
or in the STOP and ACC position.
can only be opened when the ignition the maximum loads allowed
To open the luggage compartment lid (see section on “Capacities and
key is removed on or in the STOP and
from the outside, press button B on the Technical Specifications”). Also check
ACC position.
ignition key or C on the lid, or insert that the objects contained in the
Raising the lid is facilitated by the
the key in the lock of the luggage
compartment lid and turn it
action of the gas struts.Vehicles are luggage compartment are arranged 4
also equipped with a lever inside the properly.
anticlockwise, thus mechanically
luggage compartment, which permits
releasing the lock. This mechanical
opening from the inside.
procedure does not inhibit any
subsequent electric opening request,
whether coming from button A or B.
Depending on the Bose® Infotainment
settings, the luggage compartment

C
B

Luggage compartment 107


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 108 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

The luggage compartment is Emergency opening of the


illuminated by a dome light that comes luggage compartment
on automatically when the lid is In the event that somebody is
opened; switching off is timed. accidentally locked in the luggage
If the luggage compartment lid is left compartment, the lid can be opened
open, the light switches off after a few from the inside by pulling the lever D
minutes. To turn it on again, close the positioned in the center of the lid.
lid and then re-open it. The lever is visible even in poor light
conditions.
WARNING: If the luggage
compartment lid is opened
mechanically (i.e., by inserting and
then turning the key in the lock) the
power locking will be disabled. When
4 the lid is reopened electrically, normal
operation will be restored.

108 Luggage compartment


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 109 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuel tank door The cap is linked to the fuel door with Fuel tank door emergency
a strap, so that it cannot be misplaced opening
while refuelling. If necessary, the door can be opened by
The fuel tank door is found on the
The door must be re-closed manually. pulling the small cable C located on the
rear, left-hand side of the vehicle. To
Before closing the door, check that the left-hand side of the luggage
open the door, press button A located
fuel filler cap is fully tightened. compartment.
on the left of the steering wheel.
It can be operated only when the
No open flames or lit
ignition key is removed or turned to
cigarettes close to the filler:
STOP.
risk of fire!
The cap’s hermetic seal may allow a
slight pressure increase in the tank. Also avoid putting your face close to
Any hissing noise while the cap is being the filler neck so as not to inhale
released is therefore completely noxious fumes.
normal.
When refuelling, the cap should
4
remain attached to the door by means
of the respective hook B.

B
C
A

Fuel tank door 109


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 110 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Keys The key can be used for: 2) If the CODE warning light stays
– start-up; on and the OBDII one goes off
after 18 seconds and then comes on
The Maserati CODE system – door central locking;
again immediately, the code is not
In order to increase protection against – electrical and manual opening of the recognized. If this occurs, turn the key
attempts at theft, the vehicle is luggage compartment; to STOP and then back to MAR (ON). If
equipped with an electronic engine – activating/deactivating the alarm the immobilizer stays on, try with the
immobilizer system (Maserati CODE), system. other key. If you still cannot start the
which is automatically activated when engine, try the emergency start
the ignition key is removed. Operation procedure (see on page 190) and
Each ignition key contains an Each time the ignition key is removed contact your local Authorized Maserati
electronic device which transmits a the from the STOP position, the Dealer.
code signal to the Maserati CODE protection system will activate the
control unit, and engine ignition is engine immobilizer. While driving, with the ignition key in
4 enabled only if the key code is When the key is turned to MAR (ON), the MAR (ON) position:
recognized by the system. upon engine start-up: 1) If the CODE warning light
Two keys are supplied with the vehicle. 1) If the code is acknowledged, the comes on, it means that the system
warning light CODE on the is running a self-diagnosis cycle. At
instrument panel will turn off within a the first stop, you can test the
second, while the OBDII warning system: turn the ignition key to
light, once the ECU diagnosis cycle has STOP to stop the engine and then
been completed, will turn off after back to MAR (ON). The warning
about 18 seconds. Under these light CODE will come on and
conditions, the protection system should go out in approximately one
recognizes the key code and second. If the warning light stays
deactivates the engine immobilizer. on, repeat the procedure described
Turn the key to start the engine. previously leaving the key at STOP
for more that 30 seconds. If the fault
persists, contact your local
Authorized Maserati Dealer.

110 Keys
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 111 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

2) If the CODE warning light Duplicating the keys Emergency starting


flashes, it means that the vehicle is When ordering additional keys, If the MASERATI CODE fails to
not protected by the immobilizer remember that memorizing (up to deactivate the engine immobilizer, the
device. Contact your local maximum of 7 keys) must be carried warning light CODE will light up
Authorized Maserati Dealer out on all the keys, including those with a fixed light, the OBDII
immediately to have the codes of all already in your possession. Contact warning light will go out after four
the keys restored in the memory. your local Authorized Maserati Dealer seconds and then will come on
directly, bringing with you all the keys immediately and the engine will not
WARNING: Strong impact can damage in your possession, the Maserati CODE start. To start the engine, it is necessary
the electronic components in the key. system CODE CARD, the electronic to follow the emergency start
alarm system CODE CARD, a personal procedure.
WARNING: Each key supplied has its ID and the identification and
own specific code, which must be registration documents proving WARNING: We recommended that you
stored in the memory of the system ownership of the vehicle. The codes of read the entire procedure before
control unit. any keys that are not available when carrying it out. If you make a mistake, 4
the new storage procedure is carried you should turn the ignition key to
out will be deleted from the memory STOP and repeat the operations from
to prevent any lost or stolen keys being step 1.
used to start the vehicle.

Keys 111
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 112 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

1) Read the 5-digit electronic code on 5) The OBDII warning light starts If the OBDII warning light remains
the CODE CARD. flashing again. As soon as the on, turn the key to STOP and repeat
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR (ON): displayed number of flashes is equal the procedure from step 1.
the CODE and OBDII to the second digit of your CODE This procedure can be repeated an
warning lights are on. CARD, press down the accelerator unlimited number of times.
pedal and keep it pressed.
3) Press the accelerator pedal fully
6) Proceed in the same manner for the WARNING: After an emergency
down and keep it pressed.
remaining digits in the code on the start-up, you should contact your local
Approximately 8 seconds later, the
CODE CARD. Authorized Maserati Dealer, otherwise
OBDII warning light will go off.
you will have to perform the
Release the accelerator and get 7) When the last digit has been
emergency start procedure every time
ready to count the number of times entered, keep the accelerator pedal
the engine is started.
the OBDII warning light flashes. pressed down. The OBDII
4) As soon as the displayed number of warning light comes on for 4
flashes is equal to the first digit of seconds and then goes off; you can
4 your CODE CARD, depress the now release the accelerator pedal.
accelerator and keep it pressed 8) A quick flashing of the OBDII
down until the OBDII warning warning light (about 4 seconds)
light goes off, after being off for confirms that the operation has
approximately 4 seconds; you can been carried out correctly.
now release the accelerator pedal. 9) Start the engine turning the key
from MAR (ON) to AVV (START).

112 Keys
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 113 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Ignition switch When getting out of the After stopping the vehicle,
vehicle, remember to always always shift the gearshift
remove the ignition key, in lever to P.
The starter switch can be turned to 4
order to prevent that anybody
positions: remaining in the vehicle may If the ignition switch is
STOP - Engine off, engine immobilizer involuntarily activate the controls. tampered with (e.g., theft
and steering lock activated, connected attempt), have it checked by
devices cut-off, except those that are WARNING: The ignition key can only your Authorized Maserati Dealer to
not operated by the key (e.g., door be removed from the switch when the verify that it works properly before
lock, luggage compartment opening gearshift lever is in position P. In you drive.
control, etc.). The key can be removed. addition, it must be removed within 30
ACC - Cigarette lighter and power seconds after turning the key to STOP. If the automatic electric
sockets. The key cannot be removed. In the event that the key unlocking parking brake engagement
MAR (ON) - Driving position (on). All system fails or if it is not possible to function is deactivated,
electrical devices can operate.
AVV (START) - Engine start-up.
shift the gearshift lever to P, to remove remember to engage the parking 4
the key you must turn it to STOP, then brake manually.
remove the cap A, using a pen or
sufficiently pointed tool, then press Never leave children
the button just uncovered and at the unattended in the vehicle.
same time extract the key. Once the
key has been removed, refit the cap A.

STOP ACC
MAR
AVV

Ignition switch 113


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 114 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Electronic alarm system Activation The alarm system becomes operative


To turn on the electronic alarm system, after approximately 25 seconds and
press button A on the key: the alarm is activated if:
The electronic alarm system performs
the following functions: – the direction indicators will flash – a door is opened
– remote centralized door locking/ once; – the luggage compartment lid is
unlocking – the system beeps; opened
– perimeter surveillance, detecting the – the red LEDs on the front door – the engine compartment lid is
opening of doors, front and rear lids panels flash; opened
– motion surveillance, detecting – the vehicle's centralized door locking – someone attempts to enter the
intrusion in the passenger system is activated and locks the vehicle from a window
compartment doors. – the power supply is cut off
– vehicle movement surveillance. – the siren is disconnected
– the car moves.
4 WARNING: The engine immobilizer
operation is designed to automatically When the alarm is switched on, the
activate when the ignition key is
user may request the luggage
removed from the starter switch.
compartment opening; in this case, the
motion sensors and inclination sensors
are temporarily deactivated.
If the luggage compartment is then
closed, the sensors will be reactivated.

114 Electronic alarm system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 115 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Should the direction indicators flash 9 Deactivation Getting into the vehicle when
times when you activate the alarm To switch the electronic car alarm off, the alarm system is on
system, this means that one of the press button B on the key: When the remote control battery is
doors or lids is not closed properly and flat, to access the vehicle insert the key
– the direction indicators flash twice;
therefore is not protected by the in the lock of one of the two front
perimeter surveillance. Check for – the system gives a double beep;
doors and turn it clockwise to release
correct closing of doors, rear/front lid – the red LEDs on the front door
it: the alarm will sound but you will
and close the open one, even without panels switch off and turns green;
have to continue with the normal
deactivating the alarm system: the – the centralized door lock system is starting procedure regardless (see
direction indicators flashing once activated and the doors are page 150). The alarm will be
indicate that now the door, front/rear unlocked. deactivated.
lids are closed properly and are The alarm system is off and it is
protected by the perimeter therefore possible to get into the
surveillance. vehicle and to start the engine.
Pressing button B twice unlocks the 4
WARNING: If the direction indicators doors and also switches on the low
flash 9 times when the alarm system is beams for 30 seconds.
activated with doors, front and rear
lids properly closed, it means that the WARNING: The alarm system is not
self-diagnosis function has detected a deactivated when the key is turned in
malfunction in the system and that the locks.
you should contact your local
Authorized Maserati Dealer to have
the system checked.

Electronic alarm system 115


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 116 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Deactivating the motion sensing Alarm memory Ordering extra radio operated
alarm If the warning light appears on controls
The motion sensing system can be the display when the vehicle is started, To order extra radio operated control
deactivated by pressing button C on this means that an intrusion has been keys, contact your local Authorized
the roof. When this function is attempted during your absence. Maserati Dealer only and remember to
deactivated, the LED on the button will take with you:
flash for 3 seconds and then turn off. The alarm system memory is reset – all the keys in your possession with
when you turn the ignition key. related remote control
Deactivating the anti-lift alarm – the Maserati CODE system's CODE
Pressing button D deactivates the lift CARD
protection alarm. When this function is
– your identity card
deactivated, the LED on the button will
flash for 3 seconds and then turn off. – the identification and registration
documents proving ownership of the
4 vehicle.

WARNING: Radio-operated controls


that are not given to the dealer for the
new code storing procedure, will be
automatically deactivated in order to
prevent any lost or stolen radio-
operated controls from being used to
deactivate the electronic alarm system.

D C

116 Electronic alarm system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 117 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Replacing radio operated control To replace the remote control battery: – extract the battery H from its
batteries – extract the key by pressing button E retaining ring
If, when one of the three buttons is – undo the screw F – fit a new battery of the same type,
pressed, the corresponding function observing the indicated polarity
– remove the battery support G
does not activate, replace the remote – fit the battery support G into the
control battery after checking the remote control and secure it by
operation of the alarm system tightening the screw F.
functions with the other remote
control.

F
H
Electronic alarm system 117
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 118 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Front seats Height adjustment The 3-point shoulder/lap belt must


Grip lever A at the center and push it remain firm against the occupant's
down or up. body in order to function properly.
Never adjust the seat while
Therefore, both the driver’s and
driving. You could lose control
Seat inclination adjustment passenger’s reclining seatbacks must
of the vehicle. Moving the
(tilting) always be in a fairly upright position
seat could distract you or make you
– Front part of seat: push the front end while the vehicle is in motion;
press a pedal unintentionally. Adjust
of lever A up or down. otherwise the 3-point shoulder/lap
the driver's seat only when the vehicle
belt would not remain firm against the
is stationary. – Rear part of seat: push the rear end
occupant. Serious injury could result!
of lever A up or down.
The seats can only be adjusted with the
ignition key in the MAR (ON) position.
Adjusting the headrest
Seatback rake adjustment
It is however possible, when the door is Move the lever B up or down to align
Push lever B forwards or backwards to
closed, to operate the seat for approx. the upper edge of the headrest with
raise or lower the backrest.
4 15 seconds after turning the ignition the top of the occupant’s head.
key to STOP and then for other 15 Sitting in a reclined position
seconds after the last operation. Lumbar support adjustment
while the vehicle is in motion
Push the horizontal arrows on the
could be dangerous. The
Back/forward adjustment lever C to increase or decrease lumbar
seatback should not be tilted back too
Push lever A on the outer side of the support and the vertical arrows to raise
far.
seat forward or back. or lower it.

A B C
PA310008
118 Front seats
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 119 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Comfort Pack (optional) Also, using wheel button F the Self-adaptive system
This includes the installation of the intensity of the heating can be set at 3 The system is activated by pressing
following optional systems inside the levels. button H and it enables the seats to
seats: adapt themselves to the occupant's
Massage System body, using inflatable bags.
Ventilation system This function is activated by pressing If the button is pressed a second time,
This can be activated and deactivated the corresponding button G and, by the system is deactivated.
by rotating wheel button D. By means means of a system of inflatable and
of two fans (one in the cushion and deflatable bags enclosed in the Each system is independent of the
one in the seat back), this system cushion and seat back, it provides a others and can be operated separately
provides ventilation for the thigh and massage function in the thigh and using specific buttons for each seat.
back areas. lumbar region areas. The function can
Still using the wheel button D, the be switched off by pressing button G The Comfort screen page related to
intensity of the ventilation can be set again. the modified feature will be displayed
at 3 levels. The massage cycle lasts 5 minutes in whenever you operate any control. 4
total, after which the function cuts out
Heating system and the previous settings are restored. The seat comfort screen page can be
The heating is switched on by rotating displayed on the instrument panel by
wheel button F. Two heating pads are pressing the MODE button. This screen
used to heat the seat. When this page shows the operating status of
function is active for one or more seats, each individual system.
the relative warning light will light up
on the display. WARNING: Switch off the various
systems when not required.
D F
Winter Pack
G I With this type of equipment, the
heating system is installed in the front
seats only.

H
Front seats 119
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 120 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Storing the seats and external The memorization of a new seat Headrest
rear-view mirrors positions position cancels the one previously The headrests are adjusted electrically
The system allows different positions memorized with that particular for the height and manually for the
to be stored and recalled for the button. tilting position.
driver's seat and for the external rear- To recall one of the stored positions
view mirrors (buttons I). with the door open, press the relative Remember that the headrests
Memorization is only possible with the button “1”, “2” or “3” briefly. must be positioned so that
ignition key in position MAR (ON). To recall the a stored position with the their upper edge is aligned
Adjust the position of the seat, the door closed, press the corresponding with the top of the occupant’s head.
headrest, the external rear-view button until hearing a tone that In fact, only in this position can they
mirrors and the steering wheel, then confirms the seat has stopped. provide the support required in the
engage the reverse gear and event of a bumper-to-bumper
reposition the external passenger side WARNING: To stop the seat, press one collision.
mirror to ensure the best possible of the buttons - “1”, “2” or “3” -, or
4 visibility to perform the maneuver, one of the adjustment controls. To adjust the headrests’ vertical
then disengage the reverse gear. Next position, move the lever B upwards or
press one of the three buttons "1", WARNING: Malfunctioning of the seat downwards.
"2" or "3", each one corresponding to control unit is indicated by a sequence
a memorizable position, for 3 seconds of 5 tones emitted when the ignition
until you hear a double confirmation key is turned to position STOP: contact
tone. your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
Lumbar support adjustment is not to correct the failure.
included in the seat position
memorization.

120 Front seats


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 121 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Armrest Easy entry/exit system


To access the compartment, lift the The easy entry/exit system makes it
armrest J pulling on the handle K. To easier for the driver to get in and out
close the compartment, lower the of the vehicle. In fact, before the driver
armrest until the lock engages. gets out, the seat moves back and the
Inside the armrest there is a steering wheel rises.
temperature controlled beverage The function is activated when the
holder. door is opened, only if the key has
been extracted or is in position STOP.
On re-entry, the driver finds the seat
and steering wheel still in these
positions. After sitting down and
closing the door, upon turning the key
to position MAR (ON), both the seat
and the steering wheel return to their 4
normal driving positions.
This function can be disabled/enabled
by pressing button L.

J
L

Front seats 121


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 122 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rear seats Seat inclination adjustment (tilting) To access the compartment, lift the
This is possible for the side seats only, armrest cover using the handle C. The
and it is performed by pushing control compartment houses a control D to
These can seat three passengers.
A located on the door panel, next to move the front passenger seat forward
The two side seats can be both tilted
the seat you wish to adjust either and back. To close the compartment,
and moved back and forward
upwards or downwards. lower the cover.
electrically.

Rear seat adjustments Armrest


The rear armrest is moveable and can
Lengthways adjustment be folded up into the seatback. To
This is possible for the side seats only, lower it, pull the handle, B. To close it,
and it is performed by pushing control pull it upwards then push it back into
A, located on the door panel, next to its seating.
the seat you wish to adjust either Inside the armrest there is a
4 forwards or backwards. compartment containing a 12 volt
power socket.

A B

122 Rear seats


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 123 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Two cup holders are housed in the Comfort Pack (optional) Ventilation system
compartment D. To pull it out, press on This includes the installation of the By means of two fans (one in the
its front. following optional systems and cushion and one in the seatback), this
If the rear-seat comfort pack is controls in the rear seats: system provides ventilation for the
installed, you will find the relative thigh and back areas. The relative
controls inside the armrest on the rear Massage System wheel button can also be used to
seats. This system uses the inflatable bags adjust the intensity of the ventilation.
mechanism and operates in the thigh To switch on the ventilation, rotate
and lumbar region area. wheel button 3 (left-hand seat) or 6
The massage cycle lasts 5 minutes in (right-hand seat) to one of the
total, after which the function cuts out positions, either “1”, “2” or “3”,
and the previous settings are restored. depending on the air flow required. To
To activate the massage feature, press switch off the ventilation, rotate the
button 1 (left-hand seat) or 7 (right- wheel button to position “0”.
hand seat). If the button is pressed 4
again, the function is switched off.

2 9 8

D 0 0 0 0

1 4 3 6 5 7
Rear seats 123
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 124 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Heating system Comfort Pack Controls Headrests


Two heating pads are used to heat the The right-hand controls are used to The two side headrests can be both
seat. To switch on the heating, rotate adjust the right-hand seat, while the tilted and their height adjusted
wheel button 4 (left-hand seat) or 5 right-hand controls adjust the left- manually.
(right-hand seat) to one of the hand seat. The central, fixed headrest can be
positions, either “1”, “2” or “3”, 1 – 7 Massage activation/deactivation power tilted by pressing the specific
depending on the temperature 2 – 8 Lumbar support increase/ button to the left of the steering
required. To switch off the heating, decrease. wheel (see page 82) and repositioned
rotate the wheel button to position 3 – 6 Ventilation activation and by lifting it manually.
“0”. adjustment.
4 – 5 Heating activation and Remember that the headrests
Lumbar support adjustment control must be positioned so that
adjustment.
The lumbar support adjustment allows their upper edge is aligned
9 Front passenger seat backward/
the support offered by the seat back to with the top of the occupant’s head.
forward movement.
4 be changed. Press the front of button 2 In fact, only in this position can they
(left-hand seat) or 8 (right-hand seat) Winter Pack (optional) provide the support required in the
to increase lumbar support. Press the event of a bumper-to-bumper
rear of the same buttons to decrease With this type of equipment, the collision.
lumbar support. heating system is installed in the rear
seats only.
Control for front passenger seat
backward/forward movement
Press the front of button 9 to move the
front passenger seat forwards, and the
rear of the button to move it 2 9 8
backwards.

0 0 0 0

1 4 3 6 5 7
124 Rear seats
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 125 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rear-view mirrors – Mirror retraction: By turning the The mirrors are designed to fold in
selector switch A to the lower central both directions in the event of a
position, both the mirrors fold collision.
External rear-view mirrors inwards to help facilitate parking in
They can be adjusted electrically (with narrow spaces. If the selector switch
the ignition key in the MAR (ON) is set back in the upper central
position) and they are equipped with position, the mirrors return to the
anti-fog features. open position.
– Mirror selection (right-hand or left-
hand): move the selector A to the
right or left, depending upon the
mirror you wish to adjust.
– Mirror positioning: control A allows
each mirror to be adjusted with four
movements (up – down – right – left). 4
Bring the selector back to the center
to prevent mirror position being
changed accidentally.

Rear-view mirrors 125


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 126 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

The external rear-view mirror position, The side rear view mirrors feature Electrochromic internal rear-
both for the normal driving direction different curvatures; the left-hand view mirror
and for reversing, is automatically mirror is flat, while the right-hand one This can can be manually adjusted, and
memorized together with each seat is convex. is fitted with an accident-prevention
position. To memorize a new position release system in the event of a
of the external rear-view mirrors, turn Pay particular attention as collision.
the ignition key to the MAR (ON) objects viewed in the right- The electrochromic rear view mirror
position and adjust the position of the hand mirror are closer than automatically operates an anti-dazzle
mirrors; then engage the reverse gear they appear. function by gradually shading as the
and reposition the external passenger light shining on the mirror increases.
side mirror to ensure the best possible WARNING: Never retract or open the This function is automatically
visibility for maneuvering, then mirrors by hand to avoid damaging the deactivated in reverse to ensure
disengage the reverse gear. powering mechanism. maximum visibility of obstacles.
Finally, press one of the buttons “1”,
4 “2” or “3” on the seat, each one The mirrors must always be in
corresponding to a memorized the open position when the
position, until a beep confirms the vehicle is moving.
procedure is complete.
The new position of the external rear-
view mirrors will be automatically
memorized together with the seat
position.

126 Rear-view mirrors


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 127 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Steering wheel Do not adjust the steering Easy entry/exit system


wheel while the vehicle is The easy entry/exit system makes it
moving. easier for the driver to get in and out
The steering wheel can be power
adjusted, both in terms of height and of the vehicle. Before the driver gets
Under no circumstances out, the seat moves back and the
depth. remove the steering wheel;
It can only be adjusted if the ignition steering wheel rises.
this procedure, if necessary, The function is activated when the
key is in position MAR (ON). must be carried out by an Authorized
For adjustment, move control A in the door is opened, only if the key has
Maserati Dealer. been extracted or is in position STOP.
four directions.
The steering wheel position is On re-entry, the driver finds the seat
memorized, together with the position and steering wheel still in these
of the external rear view mirrors, when positions. After sitting down and
the driver’s seat position is stored. closing the door, upon turning the key
to position MAR (ON), both the seat
and the steering wheel return to their 4
normal driving positions.
This function can be disabled/enabled
by pressing button B.

Steering wheel 127


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 128 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

External lights and Light switch Parking lights


Switch A has 5 settings: The parking lights operate when the
direction indicators 0 - DRL on (*) ignition key is at STOP or ACC, or with
- Position and license plate lights the key removed.
The exterior lights and direction on They are activated by turning the light
indicators can only be operated with - Low beams on switch to position .
the ignition key at MAR (ON), with the - Parking lights It is harder to turn the switch to
exception of the parking lights, which AUTO - Automatic activation and position than to the other
can be turned on at any time. deactivation of the exterior lights positions. This is to avoid activating the
On CANADIAN version vehicles, in according to the brightness outside. parking lights unintentionally and
accordance with the current waste power.
regulations, when the ignition key is at (*) On the vehicles manufactured for When the parking lights are on, the
MAR (ON), the DRL turn on the Japanese market, these lights are warning light illuminates on the
automatically, even during the day, not operational; for all the other instrument panel.
4 and cannot be turned off ("Day Time markets where by law they may not be When the parking lights are on, if you
Running Lights" function). turned on, they can be deactivated lower the left-hand lever, only the
through the Bose® Infotainment DRLs on the left-hand side are
system. activated, while when if you move the
lever up only the DRLs on the right-
hand side are activated.

128 External lights and direction indicators


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 129 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Automatic on and off WARNING: After the external lights Twilight sensor
When the light switch A is turned to have switched on automatically, the The twilight sensor is composed of two
AUTO and the ignition key is in the front and rear fog lights can always be sensors: a global sensor, which
MAR (ON) position, the position lights, turned on manually. When the measures the brightness upwards, and
side marker, low beam lights and external lights are switched off a directional one, which measures the
license plate lights turn on and off automatically, the front and rear fog brightness in the vehicle's travelling
according to the light outside. lights are also switched off (if active) direction, so as to recognize tunnels,
and the next time the external lights etc.
WARNING: The high beams can only be are switched on automatically, only the If the sensor should fail, the system will
switched on manually by pushing the front fog lights will come on. turn on the low beams and the side
left-hand lever forward. Therefore, the user will have to switch lights, regardless of the brightness of
the rear fog lights on manually if these light outside, and the failure message
If the high beams are are required. will appear on the instrument panel
activated, they will come on display.
automatically every time the The responsibility for
The failure indication will be displayed 4
lights are switched on. We recommend switching on the lights,
so long as the switch A is turned to
therefore that you switch them off depending on the daylight
AUTO.
every time the twilight sensor and the local regulations in force,
In this case, we recommend that you
deactivates the external lights. always lies with the driver. The
switch off the automatic operation for
automatic system for switching on
the external lights and switch them on
In case of fog during the day, and off the external lights is to be
manually if necessary; contact your
the position lights and low considered as an aid for the driver. If
local Authorized Maserati Dealer as
beams will not be turned on necessary, switch the lights on and off
soon as possible.
automatically. The driver must always manually.
be ready to turn the lights on
manually, including the front and rear
fog lights.

External lights and direction indicators 129


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 130 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Direction indicators High beams Flashing the headlights


The lever has 3 settings: To switch on the high beams with the The headlights can be flashed by
B - Direction indicators off light switch in position 2, push the left pulling the left-hand lever towards the
C - Lever up: right-hand indicators hand lever towards the dashboard. steering wheel.
D - Lever down: left-hand indicators. Pull the lever towards the steering Flashing occurs also with lights off if
wheel again to switch off the high the ignition key is at MAR (ON).
Lane change function beams and switch on the low beams.
This function allows you to activate WARNING: Flashing takes place with
either the right-hand or left-hand WARNING: For the use of the high the high beams. Comply with local law
direction indicators so that they flash beams, follow local legislation. in force to avoid penalties.
three times, without moving the lever
to positions C or D, and then move it
back to the neutral position, B.
To activate this function, you must
4 simply start moving the lever to a
different position: if you move it up
you activate the right-hand direction
indicators, if you move it down you
activate the left-hand direction
indicators.
This function is useful when
overtaking or changing lanes.

130 External lights and direction indicators


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 131 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

“Follow me home” function When the function is active, every time


This feature allows you to activate the the flash control is operated, the time
timer for the position lights and for the the lights remain on is increased by 30
low beams, so that they remain on, for seconds, with a maximum total time of
a certain period, after turning off the 210 seconds. The display will show the
vehicle. value of the time set.
This function is activated by pulling the If the flash control is operated for over
turn signal lever, used to flash the 2 seconds, the function is deactivated,
headlights. The position lights and low and the indicator on the instrument
beams light up for 30 seconds, the panel’s display switches off.
message “follow me” appears on the When the function is active, returning
instrument panel display for 20 the key to the MAR (ON) position
seconds, and the lights’ activation time deactivates the system.
is displayed.
4

External lights and direction indicators 131


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 132 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Windshield wiper/washer Windshield washer Headlight washers


Pulling the lever towards the steering The headlight washers are activated
and headlight washers wheel activates the windshield washer automatically when the windshield
and wiper. washer is started and the external
The windshield wiper and washer When the windshield washer is lights are on.
work only with the ignition key in the activated, the windshield wiper starts The headlight washer and windshield
MAR (ON) position. automatically. Releasing the lever washer share the same fluid reservoir,
turns off the jet of fluid while the and a low fluid level is indicated by the
Windshield wipers blades continue to wipe for a few same warning light on the instrument
The lever has 5-settings: seconds. panel.
A - Windshield wiper stopped. The headlight washers are deactivated
B - Automatic operation. In this WARNING: Do not start the windshield if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 75 mph
position the rain sensor's sensing washer during the cold months until (120 km/h).
range can be adjusted. the windshield has warmed up. If it has
4 C - Slow continuous operation. not warmed up, the liquid could freeze
D - Fast continuous operation. on the glass and block your view.
E - Fast temporary operation.
WARNING: If there is ice or snow on
the windshield, do not activate the
windshield wiper in order to prevent
damaging the mechanism.

E
A
B
C
D

132 Windshield wiper/washer and headlight washers


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 133 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rain sensor To regulate the frequency of Sensor failure


The function of the rain sensor is to intermittent operation, with the lever When the rain sensor is activated, in
adapt the frequency of the windshield on the B position, rotate the end the event that it is malfunctioning, the
wiper’s strokes (in the intermittent section of the lever F. windshield wiper is switched on in the
operation mode) to the intensity of the Rotating the end section clockwise, intermittent operation mode and the
rain. intermittent operation varies from a sensing range is set by the user,
All the other functions controlled by maximum (fast intermittent wipe) to a regardless of whether or not there is
the right-hand lever (windshield minimum (slow intermittent wipe). rain on the windshield.
wipers off, headlight and windshield If the engine is turned off during In this case, we recommend that you
washer in continuous slow and fast automatic windshield wiper operation, turn off the rain sensor and turn on the
operation mode and in temporary fast with the lever in position B, to wiper, if necessary, in continuous
operation mode) remain the same. reactivate the function the next time mode. Contact your local Authorized
The rain sensor is activated the engine is started, the lever must be Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
automatically by bringing the right- moved to A (stop position) then
hand lever to position B. The sensor's returned to position B. 4
setting range varies progressively,
from the windshield wiper's stationary Before cleaning the front
position - when the windshield is dry - windshield (for example in
to the windshield wiper's second speed service stations) make sure
- in conditions of pouring rain. the rain sensor is deactivated or that
the key is turned to STOP. The rain
sensor must be off also when washing
the car by hand or in automatic car
washes.

WARNING: In case of ice or snow on


the front windshield, do not activate
the rain sensor to avoid damaging the
wiper motor.

Windshield wiper/washer and headlight washers 133


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 134 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Bose® Infotainment The navigation system assists The system controls and main
the driver with advice and functions are listed below. The vehicle
suggestions for the best route is equipped with an annex to the
This vehicle is equipped with Bose®
to take for reaching the set owner's manual, describing the Bose®
Infotainment system, an advanced user destination through voice guidance Infotainment fully and listing all of the
interface which combines innovative and graphic information. The warnings and precautions for use,
and exclusive technical features to suggestions provided by the which are important for safe use of the
provide entertainment, navigation, navigation system do not relieve the system. We recommend that you read
communication and information driver from full responsibility for this annex carefully and thoroughly
functions within a single system. In maneuvers made through traffic while and that you keep it within reach at all
addition, this vehicle is equipped with driving, or from compliance with laws times.
Bose® Surround Sound System, and other provisions regarding road
acoustically optimized for the Maserati traffic. The driver is always
Quattroporte. responsible for safe driving.
For more information on the system
4 functions and their use, please refer to
the dedicated manual. These functions
include enhanced radio reception with
easier station tuning, automatic
playback from almost every kind of
audio disc, and the exclusive Bose
uMusic® system that learns your
musical preferences and automatically
plays your favorite music. The system
also features voice recognition for a
number of key functions and can be
customized to match your personal
preferences.

134 Bose® Infotainment


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 135 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Controls
A - Bose® Infotainment
B - Front air conditioning and heating
system controls
C - Rear air conditioning and heating
system controls (optional)

C 4

Bose® Infotainment 135


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 136 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Main panel controls 4) Outer tuning knob. 7) USB port.


1) Zoom map +. Rotation: selects the categories. 8) Phone mode activation.
2) Button pressed briefly: 5) Inner tuning knob. 9) Navigation mode activation.
Presets. Rotation: highlights the items 10) Variable function depending on
Recall the stations stored (1-6). within a category. the active mode, as indicated on
Button pressed at length: Confirms the selection of a the display above the button.
stores the current station (1-6). highlighted item
11) Variable function depending on
3) Cancels the current action or goes 6) Provides access to the Options the active mode, as indicated on
back to the previous screen. screen. the display above the button.
12) Digital Sources mode activation.
13) Broadcast Sources mode
activation.
1 2 3
14) CD eject.
4 15) Zoom map -.
17 4 16) Button pressed briefly:
Inner volume knob.
Rotation: adjusts the volume.
Activates the system (ON) - with
the system ON, it mutes or
unmutes it.
16 5 Button pressed at length:
Deactivates the system (OFF).
17) Outer volume knob.
Rotation: Audio settings: Bose
Sound, customized, only front
speakers, only rear speakers.

15 6

14 7
13 12 11 10 9 8
136 Bose® Infotainment
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 137 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Controls repeated on the 21) Button pressed briefly 24) Broadcast Sources Mode: Radio
steering wheel Broadcast Sources Mode: searches frequency shift shifts the radio
18) Increases the sound system volume. for the first tunable station with a frequency to the next station in
lower frequency; preset steps, starting from the
19) Decreases the sound system
CD, Music Library mode: goes to station currently tuned in.
volume.
the previous track if selected within CD, MP3, Music Library mode:
20) Button pressed briefly the first 3 seconds of track playing, selects the next folder.
Broadcast Sources Mode: searches otherwise the track is played again 25) Broadcast Sources Mode: shifts the
for the first tunable station with a from the beginning. radio frequency to the previous
higher frequency; Button pressed at length station in preset steps, starting
CD, Music Library mode: next track CD audio mode: track fast rewind. from the station currently tuned in.
selection.
22) Mode selection Broadcast, Digital CD, MP3, Music Library mode:
Button pressed at length
sources. selects the previous folder.
CD audio mode: track fast forward.
23) Mute function on/off. 26) Confirms the function, item or
value selected. 4
27) Button pressed briefly
Voice command function
activation/deactivation.
Button pressed at length
Repeats the last voice guidance
message given by the navigator.
18 19 20 21 28) Button pressed briefly
24 24 Phone mode activation.
Place call.
Accept incoming call.
26 26 End Phone call in progress.
Button pressed at length
25 Reject incoming Phone call.
25
27 28 23 22

Bose® Infotainment 137


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 138 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Air conditioning and


heating system

D
E

B A

D A

4
A

H
F

138 Air conditioning and heating system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 139 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

A - Front central and lateral vents Adjustable vents with direction Fixed air distribution vent
B - Upper dashboard vent option These cannot be adjusted in any way
These can be positioned vertically and and are designed specifically for
C - Lower dashboard vents
horizontally by means of control I. demisting/defrosting or cooling
D - Upper lateral dashboard vents Using control J, the air flow certain areas.
E - Windshield vents distribution can be adjusted. Vents B, C, D, E and H have the same
F - Rear central vents Vents A, F and G have the same features.
G - Rear lateral vents features.
H - Vents beneath seats

J
Air conditioning and heating system 139
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 140 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Front automatic heating/air 5) 7-position air distribution on the 9) air recirculation activation/
conditioning controls (A) right-hand side deactivation button
1) left-hand temperature setting 6) air conditioner system's compressor 10) automatic/manual system control
2) right-hand temperature setting activation/deactivation button button
3) fan speed adjustment control 7) single/dual zone selection button 11) heated rear window activation/
4) 7-position air distribution on the 8) defrosting/demisting activation/ deactivation buttons
left-hand side deactivation button 12) rear instrument panel activation/
deactivation button.

4
10 9 12 10

4 1 11 7 3 6 8 2 5

140 Air conditioning and heating system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 141 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rear automatic heating/air 16) right-hand temperature setting 20) 3-position air distribution setting,
conditioning controls (B) 17) single/dual zone selection button on the left-hand side
(optional) 18) fan speed adjustment control 21) 3-position air distribution setting,
13) automatic/manual system control on the right-hand side
19) air conditioner system compressor
button
activation/deactivation button
14) left-hand temperature setting
15) automatic/manual system control
button

13 15 4

20 14 17 18 19 16 21

Air conditioning and heating system 141


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 142 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

General All the functions listed above can be Activation


The vehicle is equipped with an modified manually, i.e., the user can The system can be activated in a
automatic dual-zone air conditioner/ select one or more of these functions, number of ways, however, begin by
heater, which is designed to adjust the as he/she wishes, using the control pressing one of the buttons 10, 13 or
air temperature, distribution and flow panel. 15 AUTO and using the buttons 1, 2, 14
in the vehicle's passenger The manual selections are always given or 16 to set the temperature required.
compartment, in two separate zones: priority over the automatic ones and This way, the system will operate in
left-hand side and right-hand side. are memorized until the user chooses fully automatic mode so that the
In fact, the system can be controlled the automatic control again. temperatures set will be reached as
from the front by means of panel A, When a function has been set quickly as possible.
incorporated in the central console, manually, the other automatic In this condition, manual interventions
and also from the rear, by means of functions will not be affected. will activate the following functions:
panel B, housed in the end section of The following parameters/functions – MONO button 7 or 17 adjusts the air
the console. can be set/modified manually: temperature and distribution in the
4 The rear instrument panel can be – left-hand/right-hand side air two heating/air conditioning areas.
activated/ deactivated using the REAR temperature – REAR button 12 activates the rear
button 12 on the front panel. – fan speed control panel
When the rear instrument panel B is
– air distribution setting on 7 positions – button 6 or 19 switches off the
active, the front panel A is disabled.
(left/right) compressor
Both instrument panels allow the user
to control the following parameters/ – compressor activation – button 8 activates/deactivates the
functions: – single/dual-zone distribution priority defrosting/demisting function on the
– defrosting/demisting function (MAX front and side windows
– left-hand/right-hand air
temperature DEF) – button 11 activates/deactivates the
– air recirculation function heated rear window.
– left-hand/right-hand air distribution
– automatic/manual control of the By altering any other parameter
– fan speed (stepless change)
system manually, such as the air temperature
– compressor activation or distribution, these features switch
– recirculation. – heated rear window
from the fully automatic control mode
– system deactivation (FULL AUTO) to the manual mode
– activation of rear control panel. (AUTO).

142 Air conditioning and heating system


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 143 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

On starting the vehicle after stopping, Recirculation (3°C), the automatic recirculation
the various parameters are controlled This is activated when button 9 is function is switched off automatically.
manually or automatically depending pressed and allows only the air already After prolonged operation (over 15
on the options selected by the user in the passenger compartment to minutes), the system switches off the
before turning the engine off. As a circulate. recirculation function automatically
consequence, all the manual The recirculation feature has various for safety reasons, allowing the
operations carried out before the operation modes: exchange of air once again.
vehicle stop are memorized and kept – Automatic (AQS) (LED on button
stored until the next start up. switched on) Forced closed recirculation
This also applies for the OFF function; In this type of operation, the amber
– Forced closed recirculation (LED on
if it were in the OFF position before LED switched on indicates the
button switched on)
stopping, when next started the recirculation flap is closed.
system should still be in the OFF – Forced open recirculation (LED on
position. button switched off). Forced open recirculation
Automatic In this type of operation, the LED 4
System deactivation In the automatic operation mode, the switched off indicates the outside air
If the compressor is deactivated on recirculation is switched on when: flap is open.
both the front and rear panels,
– the air quality sensor detects the
switching the air flow reduction AUTO mode
presence in the air of pollutants that
control 3 below the first bar results in When this button is pressed (one
may enter the vehicle during traffic
the fan switching off. button per zone), the automatic
jams, when driving in built-up areas
If the compressor is enabled on the system will take control of the
or when passing through tunnels.
front and rear control panels, the air following functions once again:
flow reduction control 18 cannot – the compressor is activated, outside
– air distribution (for the side
request flow rates below the first bar temperatures are over 37.4°F (3°C) or
concerned)
(it will not switch off the fan). the speed is below 3.73 mph (6 km/
h), to prevent air polluted by exhaust – fan speed
When switched OFF, the heated rear
window button 11 and recirculation gas during stops from entering the – compressor operation (with ECON
button 9 are controlled normally passenger compartment. When the LED lit up)
without activating the heating/ air vehicle speed exceeds 7.46 mph (12 – air recirculation function.
conditioning system. km/h), the system resets the previous
Exiting the OFF status, the automatic control conditions.
recirculation will forcibly return to the When the compressor is deactivated or
automatic mode. outside temperatures are below 37.4°F
Air conditioning and heating system 143
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 144 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Rear control panel System initialization


The rear passengers can also utilize the Every time the battery is reconnected,
system using the controls on the rear when the vehicle is started, a system
control panel. initialization procedure is required.
The rear panel is activated by pressing This is run by activating the
button 12 REAR, on the front control compressor. Both displays
panel. automatically show the passenger
compartment temperature set at
REAR function 71.6°F (22°C).
Pressing the button 12 REAR (the The system is set up as follows:
relative LED will come on) will result in – AUTO (automatic operation, the
the following: words FULL AUTO appear on the
– the controls incorporated in the rear display).
control panel will be enabled; – Compressor enabled (the LED on the
4 – the options set from both control button lights up).
panels will be repeated on the rear – Defrosting/demisting (MAX DEF)
display. deactivated (the LED on the button is
This function is active both in the switched off).
MONO and DUAL zone. – Heated rear window deactivated
Pressing the button 12 REAR once (the LED on the button is switched
again (LED on) will disable the controls off).
on the rear panel (LED off).
– Recirculation controlled by the
automatic system (if active, ‘AQS’
will appear on the display).
– the air ventilation and distribution
are set by the system.
– REAR deactivated (the LED on the
button is switched off).

144 Air conditioning and heating system


Cap4_usa.fm Page 145 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 8:52 AM

Bose® Surround Sound Diversity system 2) a 5.12 in (13 cm) Neodymium (Nd®)
This is composed of two aerials linked Richbass woofer powered by an
together, which are activated amplifier with dual-stage
The digital Hi-Fi system, developed in
reciprocally to obtain the best signal modulation, fitted into the footrest
association with Bose®, includes
reception. on the passenger’s side
exclusive accessories such as the
innovative speakers with neodymium The sound system in the vehicle 3) a tweeter on each of the rear door
technology, also making use of other consists of: panels
systems such as AudioPilot® and active 1) three medium and high range 4) a neodymium low and medium
electronic equalization. speakers located on the upper part range speaker on each of the rear
of the dashboard door panels
AudioPilot® System
The AudioPilot® technology detects
and measures the ambient noise, and 5 6 8
consequently adjusts a number of 9 1
acoustic signal parameters, 4
continuously, to ensure the sound
quality inside the passenger 3
compartment is always at optimum
levels. 7

Electronic equalization
The electronic equalization helps 3 4 4 2
ensure absolute sound precision at any
volume. The automatic output
frequency balancing feature makes 1
manual adjustments using switches or 7 8
dials unnecessary. 9

5 6 1

2
3 4 9
1

Bose® Surround Sound 145


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 146 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

5) one 9.84 in. (25 cm) Power


Neodymium (Nd®) woofer mounted
on the rear parcel shelf
6) Two 90 mm Nd (Neodymium)
Twiddlers for high and medium
frequencies, positioned on the sides
of the rear luggage shelf
7) digital amplifier with AudioPilot®
technology controlled by a
microphone positioned to the right
of the steering wheel and
customized six-channel equalization
8) AudioPilot® sensor
4 9) audio CD player and single-CD drive
for GPS navigation maps, in the
center of the dashboard
– aerial incorporated into rear window
– aerial incorporated in the windshield

146 Bose® Surround Sound


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 147 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Bose® Surround Sound 147


Cap5_FOTO.fm Page 148 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:14 PM

148
Cap5_FOTO.fm Page 149 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:14 PM

Using the vehicle

Starting the engine 150


Electronic automatic gearbox 152
Fuel economy 163
Using the brakes 164
Use of the engine 165
Cruise Control 167
Skyhook suspension 170
Headlights 173
Driving conditions 174
Emission control devices 177 5
Parking 179
Tires 182
Useful accessories to keep on-board 187

149
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 150 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Starting the engine 1) Ensure that the handbrake is Starting-off when the engine is
engaged and that the doors are cold
closed. Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden
Keep the brake pedal pressed
when starting the engine. 2) Keep the brake pedal pressed when accelerations and rev the engine at
starting the engine. low-medium speeds. High-
3) Do not press the accelerator pedal. performance driving should be
WARNING: If you attempt to start the 4) Check that the letter P (PARK) or N avoided until the water temperature
engine without depressing the brake (NEUTRAL) is shown on the gear reaches 149 °F - 158 °F (65–70 °C).
pedal, a message on the display will display and on the instrument
warn you to push it. panel.
5) Turn the ignition key to the AVV
It is dangerous to run the
(START) position and release it as
engine in a closed space. The
soon as the engine starts. Do not
engine consumes oxygen and
keep the key turned to the AVV
discharges carbon dioxide, carbon
(START) position for a long time. In
monoxide and other toxic gases.
the event of misfiring, turn the key
5 WARNING: Before start-up, switch off
back to the STOP position and wait
until the gearshift display switches
the electrical devices with a high
power consumption (air-conditioning off and then repeat the entire
and heating system, heated rear procedure.
window, headlights, etc.). The engine can only be started when
the gearshift lever is in P (PARK) or N
WARNING: Do not start the engine if (NEUTRAL).
the fuel level in the tank is low. When the engine has started up,
release the key, which will
automatically return to the MAR (ON)
position.
In the event of misfiring, turn the key
back to the STOP position and wait
until the gearshift display switches off
and then repeat the entire procedure.

150 Starting the engine


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 151 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Emergency starting with an Do not approach the battery to MAR (ON) and then to STOP to
auxiliary battery with open flames or lit obtain a further 30 seconds within
If the battery is flat, the engine can be cigarettes and not to cause which to remove the key. In the event
started using another battery having sparks: risk of explosion and fire. that the key unlocking system fails or if
it is not possible to shift the gearshift
the same or slightly higher capacity
WARNING: Do not use a battery- lever to P, to remove the key you must
than the flat one.
charger for emergency starting under turn it to STOP, then remove the cap A,
Proceed as follows:
any circumstances. You could damage using a pen or sufficiently pointed
1) Connect the positive terminals (+) of the electronic systems, particularly the tool, then press the button just
the two batteries with a jumper control units managing the ignition uncovered and at the same time
cable. and fuel supply functions. extract the key. Once the key has been
2) Connect the negative terminals (-) of removed, refit the cap A.
the two batteries with a jumper Remember that if the engine
cable. is not started, the brake servo
3) Start the engine. and power steering systems
4) When the engine starts, remove the are not activated and therefore the
cables in the reverse order to the effort required on the brake pedal and
above. steering wheel is much greater. 5
If the engine does not start after a
number of attempts, do not continue,
Turning off the engine
consult your local Authorized Maserati With the engine idling, rotate the
Dealer. ignition key to the STOP position.
A burst on the accelerator pedal
Do not carry out this before turning off the engine has no
procedure if you do not have purpose and increases fuel
experience; incorrect consumption.
procedures can cause high electrical
discharges and even cause the battery WARNING: The ignition key can only
to explode. be removed from the switch when the
gearshift lever is in position P. In
addition, it must be removed within 30
seconds after turning the key to STOP.
If you do not remove the key within 30 A
seconds, you will need to turn it back
Starting the engine 151
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 152 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Electronic automatic The gearbox operating mode is Shift-Lock


controlled by the lever A. This safety system allows you to shift
gearbox This lever can be positioned in the from P (PARK) to another position only
following sectors: if the brake pedal is depressed. This
The electronically-controlled gearbox P – (PARK) prevents the vehicle from involuntarily
has six forward gear ratios and one R – (REVERSE) jumping forward or backward.
reverse gear. The gears can also be N – (NEUTRAL)
engaged manually once you have D – (DRIVE) Key-Lock
shifted the gearshift lever to the sector + / - – (MANUAL) This function allows you to remove the
provided. The position of the gearshift lever A is key from the ignition switch only when
The gearbox controls are the shown on the gear display E by the the gearshift lever A is in position P
following: illumination of the corresponding and within a maximum time of 30
A - Gearshift lever letter. This letter is also shown on the seconds; when this time has elapsed,
B - Button on the gearshift lever to instrument panel display. the key can no longer be removed.
engage reverse gear R and park P
WARNING: In order to properly use the Starting the engine
C - SPORT button The engine can only be started when
Automatic Gearbox, it is essential that
5 D - ICE (low grip) button you read through this whole chapter, the gearshift lever A is in position P or
E - Gear display. so that you can learn what the correct N.
The SPORT and ICE modes can be and permitted operations are.
selected both when the gearbox is set The gearbox is also equipped with Always start the engine
to automatic (AUTO) and to sequential Shift-Lock and Key-Lock safety systems. holding the brake pedal
manual (MANUAL) operation. depressed.

A WARNING: Upon setting off, after


starting the engine, do not depress the
C
B accelerator pedal before and while
shifting the gearshift lever A.
This is particularly important when the
D engine is cold.

E F

152 Electronic automatic gearbox


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 153 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Driving the vehicle the engine running, as this may lead to seconds from turning the key to STOP.
After starting the engine, let the malfunctions. The letter P (Key-Lock safety) is
engine idle with the brake pedal displayed on the instrumental panel
depressed (Shift-Lock safety), then WARNING: For more comfortable for the full 30 seconds.
shift the gearshift lever A to D, or to starting (with the gearshift lever in D, If you do not remove the key within 30
the sequential manual operating R or Manual and the electric parking seconds, you will need to turn it back
position + or - . brake - EPB - engaged), push the brake to MAR (ON) and then to STOP to
Release the brake pedal and gradually pedal, manually deactivate the EPB obtain a further 30 seconds within
depress the accelerator pedal. system by pulling the lever F upward, which to remove the key.
and push the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: The gearshift lever can only WARNING: In the event that the key
be shifted from position P when the Stopping the vehicle unlocking system fails or if it is not
ignition key is in the MAR (ON) Regardless of the position of the possible to shift the gearshift lever to P,
position and the button B and the gearshift lever A, simply depress the to remove the key you must turn it to
brake pedal are depressed (Shift-Lock brake pedal to stop the vehicle. STOP, then remove the cap G, using a
safety). pen or sufficiently pointed tool, then
Always depress the brake press the button just uncovered and at
For safety reasons, the gearshift lever
pedal when the gearshift the same time extract the key. Once 5
A can be shifted from D to R and P only
lever is moved to the D, R or the key has been removed, refit the
when the button B is pressed. It is also
MANUAL positions with the engine cap G.
advisable to depress the brake pedal
idling. If the brake pedal is not
during this maneuver.
depressed the vehicle may move
WARNING: Do not run the engine at forward.
top RPM until it has reached its
operating temperature. When the gearshift lever is in
position D, R or MANUAL, the
WARNING: In case of performance engine idling and the vehicle
starts, check that the electric parking on an even ground, if the brake pedal
brake is deactivated. is not depressed, the vehicle tends to
move.
Do not keep the vehicle
stationary for a long time The ignition key can be removed from
with the brake pedal the switch only when the gearshift
depressed, the gearshift lever in D and G
lever A is in position P and within 30

Electronic automatic gearbox 153


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 154 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If you turn off the engine with the Selecting automatic or sequential Automatic operation (AUTO)
gearshift lever A in a position different manual operating mode
To set automatic operation, shift the
from P, an acoustic signal will sound for The gearbox can be used both in fully
gearshift lever A to one of the
a few seconds and a message will be automatic (position D) and in
following positions:
displayed indicating to shift the lever sequential manual (positions + or -)
P – Park
to P. mode.
R – Reverse gear
To select the desired mode, shift the
N – Neutral
When the driver’s door is opened with gearshift lever A to:
D – Drive, automatic forward gear
the gearshift lever A in a position D – automatic gearshifting (AUTO)
(6 ratios)
different from P, an acoustic signal will MANUAL (+ / -) – sequential manual
sound for a few seconds and a message gearshifting.
The position of the gearshift lever is
warning the driver that the gearshift The lever can always be shifted from
shown on the gear display E by the
lever is not in P will be displayed. one position to the other, even when
illumination of the corresponding
the vehicle is moving.
letter. This letter is also displayed on
Gearshifting is always active You can actually continually shift
the instrument panel.
and may be performed even between D and MANUAL.
when one or more doors, the If automatic gearshift mode is
The gearshift lever A can freely be
5 engine compartment lid or the selected, the word AUTO and the letter
shifted from D to N. The button B must
luggage compartment lid are open. D will be shown on the instrument
also be pressed to engage and
Therefore, in these conditions, take panel display, while for sequential
disengage R.
great care to avoid moving the manual gearshifting, the word
Position P is engaged by pressing the
gearshift lever and so accidentally MANUAL and the gear engaged will be
button B and then moving the
engage gears. shown.

154 Electronic automatic gearbox


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 155 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

gearshift lever; it is disengaged by If you turn off the engine with the – Remove the pocket-change tray H.
pressing the button and the brake gearshift lever A in a position different – Using the screwdriver provided in
pedal at the same time. It is advisable from P, an acoustic signal will sound for the toolkit, push on the gearshift
to also hold the brake pedal depressed a few seconds and a message will be lever locking mechanism through
when moving the gearshift lever to the displayed indicating to shift the lever the hole.
other positions. to P.
– At the same time, slightly move the
P – Park gearshift lever towards N in order to
When the driver’s door is opened with
When parking the vehicle, shift the release the lever locking mechanism.
the gearshift lever A in a position
lever to P. A gearbox device will lock different from P, an acoustic signal will – Take the screwdriver out of the hole,
the driving wheels. sound for a few seconds and a message taking care not to move the
warning the driver that the gearshift gearshift lever.
WARNING: Shift the lever to position P lever is not in P will be displayed. – Move the gearshift lever fully back
only when the vehicle is stationary. to N.
Therefore, it is advisable to perform WARNING: In the event of a battery – Cap the hole using the tray H to
this maneuver with the brake pedal failure, manually release the driving prevent foreign bodies from falling
depressed. wheel locking device before you drive. into the gearbox and damaging it.
The gearshift lever is now released. 5
WARNING: To prevent accidental In the event of a battery failure, shift
engagement, the gearshift lever can the gearshift lever from P to another
only be shifted from P to any other While moving the gearshift lever,
position before moving the vehicle.
position when the button B and the remember to press the button B on the
To do this, follow the emergency
brake pedal are depressed. lever.
procedure described below:

WARNING: Before getting out of the


vehicle, check that the automatic
parking brake is engaged. Shift the
gearshift lever to P even when you
need to get out of the vehicle for only
H
a few seconds leaving the engine
running.

Electronic automatic gearbox 155


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 156 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

WARNING: Work extremely carefully R – Reverse gear D – Automatic forward gear


so as not to damage the trim panels. With the vehicle stationary, the engine Select this position when you wish to
idling and the button B pressed, shift use of all the automatic gearshift
If the automatic parking brake the gearshift lever A to position R. It is functions.
engagement system is active, the EPB is advisable to also depress the brake With the vehicle stationary and the
automatically applied when the pedal when shifting to this position. brake pedal depressed, move the
vehicle is stopped, (see page 179). When the lever is in position R, the gearshift lever A to D; if the gearshift
system emits an acoustic signal for a lever is position in P or R, also press the
WARNING: In the event of a battery few seconds. button B.
failure, manually disengage the You can also shift the gearshift lever to When the function is set, the letter D
parking brake (EPB) before you drive R when the vehicle is not completely illuminates on the gear display and on
(see page 179). stationary, however, this does not the instrument panel.
mean that reverse gear is actually When this function is active, the ECU
engaged, since there is a limit speed controls automatic engagement of the
above which the gear is not engaged. six gears. The gears will be engaged in
When the speed drops to below this relation to the traveling speed, engine
limit, reverse gear is engaged. RPM, accelerator position, speed with
5 which the pedal is depressed as well as
WARNING: To prevent accidental the traveling conditions (e.g., uphill,
engagement, the gearshift lever can downhill, on curves).
only be moved from R to any other The system has been programmed to
position when the button B is pressed. classify all driving styles, in relation to
It is advisable to also depress the brake the above mentioned parameters, and
pedal when shifting to this position. to associate them with the various
vehicle settings, which go from
N – Neutral extremely comfortable and economic
With the vehicle stationary and the driving to full sports-style driving. The
brake pedal depressed, move the setting is selected automatically.
gearshift lever A to N.
This function should be used when you
need to tow or push the vehicle.

156 Electronic automatic gearbox


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 157 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

+ / - – Sequential manual overrevving or underrevving, the Other system functions


operation (MANUAL) system will not accept the command.
The settings automatically selected by
This allows you to manually engage the system operate in three modes:
gears while driving. WARNING: The electronic control unit
is programmed to handle one – NORMAL
When the automatic gearshift mode is
gearshift at a time, therefore, fast and – SPORT
selected (position D), shift the
repeated requests will not necessarily – ICE (low grip).
gearshift lever A to + or -.
result in a gearshift.
When this mode is selected, the symbol Activate the desired mode by pressing
The higher or lower gear is engaged
+ or – illuminates on the gear display E, the relative button.
only if the previous gearshift
based on the position of the gearshift The active mode is shown on the
procedure has been completed.
lever, and the gear engaged is shown instrument panel display.
on the instrument panel display.
When the system refuses to engage a
For each mode there are various
gear, an acoustic signal is sounded for
When sequential manual vehicle settings, that are automatically
a few seconds.
operation is selected, set by the system in relation to the
upshifting or downshifting traveling speed, engine RPM,
Sequential manual gearshift mode can
must be performed manually. accelerator position, speed with which
only be selected from position D,
the pedal is depressed as well as the 5
whatever the driving mode (SPORT,
To engage the gears, shift the gearshift traveling conditions (e.g., uphill,
NORMAL) active upon requesting a
lever A to one of the following two downhill, on curves).
gearshift.
positions:
The gear selected by the automatic NORMAL
+ UP to engage a higher gear
gearbox will remain engaged when NORMAL mode is the default setting
- DOWN to engage a lower gear.
the lever A is moved. when the engine is started.
Shifting the lever back to D, automatic This mode is intended specifically for
WARNING: However, some conditions
will remain automatically controlled, operation will instantly be resumed, comfortable and fuel-economy driving
for example, when the engine is and a gear will be engaged based on (low longitudinal and lateral
overrevving or underrevving, the the driving style and mode selected. acceleration); the gears are shifted
system automatically engages a higher with minimum vibration in lowest
or lower gear. In the event of a failure of the noise (gearshifting at low engine
sequential manual gearshift system, RPM).
WARNING: If you request a gearshift in the gearbox ECU will select automatic
conditions where the engine is operation.

Electronic automatic gearbox 157


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 158 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

SPORT ICE (Low grip) When sequential manual mode is


SPORT mode is activated by pressing This mode can be used on particularly selected with 2nd gear engaged, a
the button C; the word SPORT slippery road surfaces (e.g., rain, snow, downshift request will be ignored.
illuminate on the instrument panel ice). To activate/deactivate this mode, While driving, the system
display. press button D. The word ICE will automatically switches to the upper
To return from SPORT mode to illuminate on the instrument panel gear if the engine reaches the pre-
NORMAL mode, press the button display. established speed rate (3,000 RPM).
again. In “Low-grip" mode the system uses “Low-grip" mode has priority over
As "SPORT" mode has a lower priority 2nd instead of 1st gear. This means SPORT mode and assists the MSP
than “low-grip” mode, if this is already that when you start from a stationary system.
active when activating “SPORT” mode, position with the engine running and
the system will ignore the command. you have selected automatic operation A downshift request from 6th
(gearshift lever in D), 2nd gear will be to 5th gear will only be
engaged; if you have selected accepted if the engine speed
sequential manual operation rate in 5th gear is lower than 3,000
(gearshift lever in MANUAL) and you RPM. As "low-grip" mode can be
shift the gearshift lever A from N to R activated at any time and the system
5 or, when the vehicle stops, 2nd gear limits the engine's speed to 3,000 RPM
will automatically be engaged. in all gears except for the 6th,
unrequested gearshifts could take
place.

In any case, it is advisable to deactivate


"SPORT" mode before selecting "low-
grip" mode.
When sequential manual operation is
C
active, regardless of the mode set
(NORMAL, SPORT, ICE), the gearbox
automatically upshifts or downshifts
D when reaching the minimum and
maximum engine RPM, respectively.
This is to prevent engine overrevving
or underrevving.

158 Electronic automatic gearbox


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 159 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Strategies during downhill driving Strategies in curves Hot-mode strategy


When the accelerator pedal is The system detects when the vehicle In the event that the engine oil or
released, the gearbox system detects goes into a curve through the lateral coolant temperature is too high or
that the vehicle is moving downhill acceleration and the steering angle. both, the gearbox system reduces the
and deactivates upshifting. When the Detecting this condition, it controls maximum engine speed to 4000 RPM.
accelerator pedal is depressed, gearshifting using a specific mode. Therefore, upshifting will occur at this
upshifting is reactivated but will be This mode is exited when the vehicle limit.
delayed by a few seconds. comes out of the curve, at a distance This strategy does not manage
When the brake pedal is depressed, that varies depending on the vehicle downhill driving, so as to always have
the gearbox system downshifts to speed. the efficiency of engine braking
provide enhanced engine braking together with the standard braking
power. Fast-off strategy system.
In other words, when driving downhill, When the accelerator pedal is fully
the gearbox system operates so as to released, the system deactivates MSP system operations
avoid upshifting and shifting gears upshifting. In order to prevent unstable driving
when the accelerator pedal is released, When the accelerator pedal is next conditions, the MSP system may
and delays gear engagement by a few depressed, upshifting is reactivated request the gearbox system to
second when the accelerator pedal is only after a few seconds. deactivate gearshifting. The system 5
depressed. In addition, when the Upshifting is also deactivated when handles this request depending on the
brakes are applied, it engages the the accelerator pedal is partially gear engaged and on the RPM, and
lowest gear in order to provide released; the system waits the time decides whether to accept it or not.
enhanced engine braking power. necessary to evaluate if the release
This strategy is aimed at making action is completed. Cruise Control
downhill driving safer. With cruise control the gearbox system
selects such settings as to provide
enhanced comfort and fuel-economy.

Electronic automatic gearbox 159


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 160 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Malfunction indication When shifting to D, only a few gears Gearbox oil temperature too high
The malfunctions indicated may be will be available for shifting, This message is displayed when the
due to two causes: depending on the malfunction found. gearbox oil has reached the maximum
temperature. In this case, the gearbox
– Gearbox failure WARNING: If a gearbox failure is ECU sets an emergency program.
– Gearbox oil temperature too high signaled, take your vehicle to the
In both cases, the warning light nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer as WARNING: We recommend that you
illuminates. soon as possible to have the problem always stop the vehicle, shift the lever
corrected. to position P or N and keep the engine
Gearbox failure idle until the temperature warning
A gearbox failure is indicated on the If the failure is signaled when the light goes off and the message
display by the message “Check engine is started, it means that the disappears from the display. Resume
transmission go to dealer”. While gearbox ECU detected a fault when driving without demanding high
driving, the ECU that controls the the vehicle was last used. Also in this engine performance.
device sets an emergency program. case, take your vehicle to the nearest If the warning light illuminates again
Authorized Maserati Dealer to have and the message is displayed again,
WARNING: In these conditions, we the gearbox checked. stop the vehicle again and run the
5 recommended that you stop the engine at idle speed until the light
vehicle and turn off the engine for at When the gearbox is goes off and the message disappears.
least one minute. When restarting the malfunctioning, drive very If the interval between the two
engine, the autodiagnostic system may carefully considering that warnings is less than 15 minutes, it is
cancel the malfunction, which will in vehicle performance is reduced. In advisable to stop the vehicle, turn off
any case be recorded by the ECU. addition, the reverse gear safety lock the engine and wait for the engine/
may not be active: absolutely do not gearbox assembly to fully cool down.
In failure conditions, the gearshift shift the lever to R when the vehicle is
lever A can still be shifted to positions moving.
R, N and D.

160 Electronic automatic gearbox


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 161 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Push start Tow the vehicle using the towing hook When towing the vehicle,
found in the toolkit. Screw the towing make sure that you observe
The engine cannot be push-started. If
hook down tightly in its seat, on the the road traffic regulations
the battery is flat, start the engine
lower, right-hand side of the front concerning both the towing device
using an appropriate emergency
bumper. and driving conduct.
battery following the instructions
given in Section 6 “In an emergency”. In order to tow the vehicle, turn the
key to MAR and engage neutral by When towing the vehicle with
shifting the gearshift lever A to N. the engine off, remember
Towing the vehicle
If the electronic parking brake (EPB) is that, without the assistance of
If you need to tow the vehicle, observe applied, you must release it, see on the brake servo, a stronger effort is
the following recommendations: page 179. required on the brake pedal for
– if possible, have the vehicle braking and on the steering wheel for
transported on a vehicle specific for Do not extract the key, as the steering.
roadside assistance and recovery steering wheel will lock
If this is not possible: automatically and you will be Screw down the towing hook
unable to steer the wheels. into its seat (approx. 11 turns).
– Tow the vehicle by raising the driving Accurately clean the threaded
wheels (rear)
If also this solution is not practicable:
WARNING: If you have to tow the seat before tightening the hook. 5
vehicle with 2 wheels raised, ensure
– - tow the vehicle for a distance of less that the ignition key is in the STOP
than 60 mi (100 km) at a speed below position. Otherwise, with MSP
35 mph (60 km/h). activated, the relative ECU stores a
malfunction and consequently the
warning light on both the
instrument panel and the display
illuminates. To reset the system you
will have to contact your Authorized
Maserati Dealer.

Electronic automatic gearbox 161


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 162 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Gearshift levers on the steering If you then keep to a constant driving


wheel (optional) style (low longitudinal and lateral
In sequential manual operating acceleration), the gearbox
conditions, upshifting and automatically switches back to
downshifting can be controlled not automatic operation.
only with the gearshift lever A but also
with the two levers positioned behind
the steering wheel.
L - Lower gear engagement lever
- DOWN;
M- Upper gear engagement lever + UP.
Also in automatic operating mode,
when the gearshift lever A is in
position D (DRIVE), you can shift to a
different gear by moving one of the
levers. This action will temporarily
5 switch the system to sequential
manual operation.

L M

162 Electronic automatic gearbox


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 163 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuel economy or not performed, the indicator will


remain illuminated for a few seconds
and will then go off. As soon as the
In order to improve fuel economy, we
conditions requiring gearshifting are
recommend that you shift gears when
met, the indicator illuminates again, as
the system prompts you to do so.
described above.
This will help you to reduce fuel
The recommended gearshift indicator
consumption without strongly
will only work when the gearbox is set
affecting vehicle performance.
to manual sequential operation.
Recommended gearshifts do not
involve downshifting.

The system will indicate when you


should shift gears by displaying a small
arrow next to the gear displayed.

This arrow illuminates just before


reaching the speed required for
5
gearshifting.
When the recommended gear has
been selected, the indicator goes off. If
the recommended gearshift is delayed

Fuel economy 163


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 164 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Using the brakes In order to fully utilize the ABS:


– You will perceive a light "pulsation"
WARNING: To obtain a good running of the brake pedal during
in of the brake pads and discs, avoid emergency braking or braking under
sudden braking during the first 190 mi. low grip conditions: this indicates
(300 km). that the ABS is operating. Do not
release the pedal but continue to
The ABS is a component of the braking press it to give continuity to the
system that offers two basic braking action.
advantages: – The ABS is designed to help prevent
– It is designed to help avoid locking of the wheels from locking, but it does
the wheels and thus skidding during not increase the physical grip limits
emergency braking and especially between the tires and the road nor
under low grip conditions. does it decrease the amount of
braking distance required to stop
– It makes it possible to brake and
the vehicle. Therefore, even if your
steer at the same time in order to
vehicle is fitted with ABS, always
5 avoid unexpected obstacles or to
ensure to keep to a safe distance
direct the vehicle where desired
from the vehicle in front of yours
when braking: this is done in
and reduce your speed when
keeping with the physical limits of
entering a curve.
the tire’s lateral grip.
The pad wear limit is indicated by the
illumination of the warning light ,
on the instrument panel.
In this event, please contact an
Authorized Maserati Dealer.

164 Using the brakes


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 165 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Use of the engine While driving Help ensure proper operation of the
Never travel with the tachometer various devices by checking the
indicator approaching the peak r.p.m. - respective control instruments.
Breaking-in
not even downhill.
Today's most modern methods of WARNING: Continuing to drive when a
production afford high precision in the red warning light illuminates could
WARNING: Under normal conditions,
construction and coupling of cause serious damage to the vehicle
all the red light warning indicators on
components. However, the moving and affect its performance.
the instrument panel multi-function
parts do undergo a settling process, in display should be off. When they
the first hours of the vehicle operation. Do not travel downhill with
illuminate, they indicate a malfunction
the engine off, as the servo
in the relative system. The only
Engine and transmission exception is the engine oil level
brake will no longer function
Avoid exceeding 5000 r.p.m. for the due to the vacuum decrease and thus
warning light, see page 246.
first 620 mi. (1000 km). after a few braking attempts, the
system becomes inefficient.
After starting the vehicle, do not
Also the servo-steering will be
exceed 4000 r.p.m. until the engine has
inefficient.
warmed up sufficiently (water
temperature: 149-158 °F (65-70 °C). 5
Do not drive keeping the engine at a
constant high speed rate for a
prolonged time.

Use of the engine 165


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 166 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Engine control system (OBDII) In addition, the system includes a WARNING: When the ignition key is
diagnostics connector that can be turned to the MAR (ON) position, if the
This system is designed to continuously
interfaced with special instruments. warning light does not turn on or
monitors the vehicle components
This makes it possible to read the error if it turns on while driving, contact
connected with emissions; it also
codes stored in the control unit, your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
indicates, when the warning light
together with a set of specific as soon as possible.
illuminates on the instrument panel,
that the components in question are in parameters for the engine operation
diagnostics cycle, on compliance with WARNING: After the problem has been
poor condition.
OBDII rules. eliminated, your local Authorized
The purpose is to:
Maserati Dealer personnel is required
– keep the system efficiency under WARNING: Once the engine is started, to perform tests on the test bench for
control the warning light will remain on a complete check of the system and if
– indicate when a problem causes an for approximately 18 seconds before necessary, also road tests which may
increase in emissions exceeding the turning off. This is a normal condition even involve long distances.
threshold established by regulations and part of the operating strategy.
in force
– indicate the need for replacement of
5 deteriorated components.

166 Use of the engine


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 167 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Cruise Control Controls Turn the rotating section B to position


Cruise Control is activated by means of (+) to save the speed reached or to
switch A, rotating section B and button increase the speed stored.
General Turn the rotating section B to position
C (RCL).
The electronic speed regulator (cruise (–) to decrease the speed stored.
Switch A has two settings:
control) enables the driver to maintain Every time dial B is reset, the speed is
the desired vehicle speed without – OFF: in this position the device is increased or decrease by approx. 1
pressing the accelerator pedal. This deactivated; mph. When the rotating section is kept
helps reduce driving fatigue on – ON: this is the normal position for turned, the speed varies continuously.
highways, especially on long trips, as the device operation. When the When a new speed is reached, it will
the set speed is automatically device is activated, the green automatically remain constant.
maintained. warning light on the display Pushbutton C (RCL) is used to recall the
turns on together with the message speed stored.
WARNING: The device can only be "Cruise Control on".
switched on at speeds exceeding The rotating section B is used to store WARNING: When the ignition key is
19 mph (30 km/h) and it switches off the vehicle speed and to keep it turned to STOP or switch A is in the
automatically when the brake pedal is constant, or to increase or decrease the OFF position, the speed saved is erased
pressed. speed stored. and the system switches off. 5
The Cruise Control function
must only be activated when
traffic and the route permit a
constant speed to be maintained
safely for a sufficiently long distance.
B A

Cruise Control 167


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 168 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Storing a speed Recalling the speed stored in the Increasing the speed stored in
Turn switch A to the ON position and memory the memory
reach the desired speed driving If the device has been switched off The speed stored in the memory can be
normally. Keep the rotating section B after braking, the speed saved increased in two ways:
turned to (+) for at least three seconds previously can be recalled as follows: – by pressing the accelerator and then
and then release it. The vehicle speed – accelerate gradually until you reach saving the new speed reached (keep
will be saved and the accelerator pedal a speed close to the one stored in the the rotating section B turned for
can then be released. memory; more than three seconds);
The vehicle will proceed at the – engage the gear selected when the or
constant speed stored in the memory speed was saved in the memory (4th,
until the brake pedal is pressed. – by turning the rotating section B
5th or 6th gear); temporarily to position (+): each
If necessary, (for example, when
overtaking), you can accelerate by – press button C (RCL). impulse transmitted by the rotating
simply pressing the accelerator pedal. section will cause a slight increase in
Afterwards, when you release the speed (about 0.6 mph - 1 km/h),
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will whereas a constant pressure on the
return to the speed saved previously. same rotating section will cause a
5 continuous increase in speed. When
the rotating section B is released, the
new speed will be automatically
stored in the memory.

168 Cruise Control


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 169 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Reducing the speed stored in the When driving with the Cruise In the case of faulty operation
memory Control activated, do not shift or failure of the device, move
The speed stored in the memory can be to neutral. It is advisable to switch A to the OFF position
reduced in two ways: switch on the Cruise Control only and contact your local Authorized
when traffic and road conditions Maserati Dealer.
– by switching off the device, pressing permit safe use of this device, that is:
the brake pedal and then saving the on straight and dry roads, Switch A can be left on the ON
new speed in the memory (turning expressways or highways, smooth- position at all times without
the rotating section B to position (+) flowing traffic and smooth asphalt. Do damaging the device. In any
for at least three seconds); not switch this device on in the city or case, it is advisable to deactivate the
or in heavy traffic. device when it is not in use. Move
– by keeping the rotating section B switch A to the OFF position to
turned to position (-) until the new The Cruise Control can only be prevent speeds from being
speed is reached, which will be switched on at speeds unintentionally saved in the memory.
stored automatically. exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h).

Resetting the speed stored in the The device can only be


memory switched on in 4th, 5th or 6th 5
The speed stored in the memory is gear, depending upon the car
automatically reset to zero: speed.
– by switching the engine off; When driving downhill with
or the device switched on, the
– by moving switch A to the OFF car may pick up speed slightly,
position. exceeding the speed stored in the
memory due to the change in the
engine load.

Cruise Control 169


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 170 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Skyhook suspension The system is controlled by an ECU The strategy used by the system
which is designed to manage the controlling the suspension damping is
solenoid valves on each shock absorber designed to reduce the vertical
The electronic system controlling the
in response to the sensor signals, oscillations of the vehicle (rolling and
vehicle suspension uses the
adjusting the suspension damping and pitching) to a minimum.
sophisticated on board sensors and is
setting. The activation of SPORT mode sets the
aimed at optimizing vehicle
The sensors that enable the ECU to suspension for sports-style driving and
performance.
calculate the vehicle speed, vertical acts on the ASR and Automatic
The system is capable of constantly
and lateral acceleration, as well as the Gearbox systems (if present) as well,
monitoring suspension damping
instantaneous brake circuit pressure, modifying their setting for racing-style
through the actuator fitted on each
and consequently to control the driving.
shock absorber. This way, the shock
suspension damping, are the
absorber setting is suited to the road
following: Self-diagnosis
conditions and vehicle dynamics, thus
improving passenger comfort and – lateral acceleration sensor Each time the engine is started, the
road-holding. – front LH vertical acceleration sensor system runs a self-diagnostics cycle,
By pressing button A the driver can – front RH vertical acceleration sensor which is indicated by the illumination
choose, even while driving, a normal or of the warning light on the display.
5 racing-type setting for the suspension,
– rear vertical acceleration sensor
depending on his/her own driving – front LH wheel acceleration sensor
style. This way, the system operates – front RH wheel acceleration sensor
with a shock absorber "softer" setting – vehicle speed sensor
in Normal mode, and a "harder" – brake pedal switch.
setting if the SPORT mode is selected.

170 Skyhook suspension


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 171 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Settings WARNING: The SPORT setting is not The electronic suspension control
advisable when roads are not in system works jointly with the MSP
The driver can select, in relation to
excellent condition or are slippery. system (electronic anti-skid device):
road, speed, driving style and comfort,
one of the two setting levels provided when the suspensions are set to
Press button A again, even while normal, stability is increased under
by the system: normal or racing-style.
driving, to reset the normal setting: medium and low grip conditions, while
Normal setting, active when the SPORT
when the normal setting is activated when the SPORT mode is enabled, the
mode is deactivated, favors comfort
the SPORT warning light on the multi- MSP system optimizes racing-style
and higher driving stability with low
function display and the button LED go driving.
and average grip conditions.
off.
Racing-style setting, active when the
WARNING: In low- and medium-grip
SPORT function is enabled, favors
conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
wheel drive and permits a racing-style
etc.) it is advisable not to activate
driving with the best road holding.
SPORT mode, even with the MSP
Whenever the vehicle is started, the
enabled.
system will provide the last setting
selected.
The racing-style setting can be
switched on only with the ignition key 5
in the MAR (ON) position and it is
enabled by pressing button A, even
while driving. When the SPORT mode
is activated, the SPORT indicator on
the multi-function display and the
button LED light up.

Skyhook suspension 171


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 172 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fault signals WARNING: In the event of a On the other hand, if the problem
malfunction in the electronic system persists, the warning light on the
If one or more electric components in
controlling the suspension, which is multi-function display will illuminate
the system prove to be faulty while
indicated by the warning light on again.
driving, the electronic control unit is
the display illuminating while driving, In both cases, the system must be
designed to turn on the relative
you should keep a moderate speed and checked by your local Authorized
warning light , accompanied by the
have the vehicle checked as soon as Maserati Dealer.
message “Check suspension” on the
possible by your local Authorized The detected fault is memorized by the
display. Moreover, the control unit
Maserati Dealer. electronic control unit and can be
regulates the shock absorbers to a
preset calibration. diagnosed at your local Authorized
If a malfunction occurs while driving, Maserati Dealer even if the warning
Should the fault involve one shock
signalled by the warning light on light is not on.
absorber only, it is no longer controlled
the display illuminating, it is advisable
by the electronic control unit and
to stop the vehicle as soon as possible
remains in the position it had when the
and turn the ignition key to the STOP
fault occurred. It is therefore possible
position and then re-start the engine.
that one of the four shock absorbers
If the malfunction is no longer present
has a fixed calibration, differing from
5 that of the other ones.
and the warning light on the
display does not illuminate again, the
electronic suspension system will
resume normal operation.

172 Skyhook suspension


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 173 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Headlights The much broader illumination of the The strong light produced by this type
side zones increases driving safety as it of headlight requires the use of an
offers the driver better detection of automatic system to keep the position
Xenon headlights other persons on the side of the road of the headlights constant and to
The gas-discharge (Xenon) headlights (pedestrians, bicycle riders and prevent glare for approaching
work with an electric arc saturated motorcycle drivers). vehicles, in the case of braking,
with Xenon gas under pressure. The electric arc requires very high acceleration or load shifting.
The light produced is superior to that voltage for lighting, but afterwards
of traditional light bulbs, in terms of power is supplied at a lower voltage. If bulb replacement is
quality (brighter light) as well as of the The headlights reach maximum necessary, contact your local
span and positioning of the area brightness about 0.5 seconds after Authorized Maserati Dealer
illuminated. being turned on. only: DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL
The advantages offered by better SHOCK!
lighting are perceptible (less eye strain
and increased orientation for the
driver and thus driving safety)
especially in the case of bad weather,
fog and/or insufficient road indications 5
owing to the broader illumination of
the side zones, which are normally left
unilluminated.

Headlights 173
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 174 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Driving conditions Capacities – Avoid heavy meals before a trip. A


light snack helps to keep your
WARNING: Use unleaded fuel only!
reflexes sharp. In particular, avoid
Before your trip The use of fuel containing lead will
drinking alcohol or take any drugs
damage the catalytic converters.
Check the following at regular that would reflect your reflexes or
intervals and always before long trips: abilities.
For fluid and lubricant specifications
– tire pressure and condition and quantities, follow the indications – Remember to check the indications
– levels of fluids and lubricants contained in the section 7 “CAPACITIES contained in the chapter “Before
– conditions of the windshield wiper AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS”. your trip”, in this section,
blades periodically.
– proper operation of the warning
Safe driving
In addition to being
lights and of the external lights. Although the vehicle is fitted with
prohibited by current
active and passive safety devices, the
regulations, it is extremely
WARNING: In any case, it is advisable to driver's conduct is always a decisive
dangerous to ride inside the luggage
carry out these checks at least every factor for road safety. compartment or on the front lid of the
500 miles (800 km), and to always Below are some simple rules for vehicle. In the event of an accident,
comply with the Maintenance
5 Schedule.
helping to travel safely in different persons transported in this manner are
conditions. You will be, no doubt, more exposed to the risk of serious
familiar with some of them but, in any injury. Passengers must only travel
It is also advisable to: case, it would be useful to read them seated in the vehicle seats, with the
– clean the glass on the external lights carefully. seat belts fastened properly. Always
and all other glass surfaces check that you and your passengers
– properly adjust the mirrors, steering Before you drive have your seat belts fastened
wheel, seats and seat belts. – Ensure that lights and headlights are correctly.
working properly.
– Adjust the position of the seat,
steering wheel and rear-view mirrors
so that you have the best driving
position.
– Ensure that nothing (mat covers,
etc.) is blocking the pedals travel.

174 Driving conditions


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 175 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Travelling – Do not drive for too many hours at a – Check that the headlights are aimed
– The first rule for safe driving is time. Make frequent stops to stretch correctly: if they are too low, they
caution. Being careful also means your legs and refresh yourself. reduce visibility and strain the eyes.
being in a position to be able to – Ensure that the air inside the If they are too high, they may bother
predict driving behaviour of other passenger compartment is refreshed the drivers of other vehicles.
drivers, that may be wrong or constantly. – Use the high beams only outside of
careless. – Never coast downhill with the densely-populated areas and when
– Keep a safe distance from vehicles in engine switched off: the braking you are sure that they will not
front of you, adjusting this distance action requires greater effort on the disturb other drivers.
in accordance to the vehicle speed pedal due to the absence of the – When another vehicle is
and traffic conditions. engine brake and of the brake servo. approaching, switch from high
– Strictly follow traffic regulations and beams (if on) to low beams.
above all, stay within the speed – Keep lights and headlights clean.
Driving at night
limits. – Outside of densely-populated areas,
The main guidelines to follow when beware of animals crossing the road.
– Long trips should be undertaken in driving at night are set out below:
optimal physical condition.
– Drive with particular caution: at
night, driving conditions are more
Driving in the rain 5
Drunk driving, or driving Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On
demanding.
under the influence of drugs a wet road all the maneuvers are more
or certain medicines is – Reduce your speed, especially on difficult since wheel grip on the
extremely dangerous for the driver roads with no streetlights. asphalt is significantly reduced. This
and for others. – At the first signs of drowsiness stop: means that the braking distances
to continue driving would be a risk increase considerably and the road
Always fasten your seat belts, for yourself and for others. Proceed holding decreases.
including any child seats. only after you have had a rest. Below you will find some advice for
Travelling without your seat – Keep the vehicle at a greater driving in the rain:
belt fastened significantly increases distance from vehicles in front of you – Reduce your speed and keep a
the risk of serious injury in the event than you would use during the day: greater safety distance from the
of a collision. it is difficult to assess the speed of vehicles in front of you. High speed
other vehicles when you can only see may result in a loss of control due to
the lights. aquaplaning.

Driving conditions 175


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 176 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Heavy rain also substantially reduces – Whenever possible, avoid Driving on snow or ice
visibility. In these circumstances, overtaking. Below is some general advice for
even during the day, turn on the low – If you are forced to stop the vehicle driving in these conditions:
beams, to be more visible to other (breakdowns, impossibility of
drivers. – Maintain a very moderate speed.
proceeding due to poor visibility,
– Position the air conditioning and etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the – Fit snow chains or specific tires if the
heating system controls for the travel lane. Then turn on the hazard road is covered with snow: see the
demisting function, in order to help warning lights and, if possible, the chapters "Snow chains" and "Winter
avoid any visibility problems. low beams. tires" in this section.
– Periodically check the conditions of – Sound the horn rhythmically if you – Mainly use the engine brake and
the windshield wiper blades. hear another vehicle approaching. avoid sharp braking.
– It is recommended to activate the
Driving in fog Driving in the mountains “Low grip function” (see page 158).
If the fog is dense, avoid travelling On downhill roads, use the engine – Avoid sudden acceleration and sharp
where possible. brake, engaging low gears so as not to changes in direction.
When driving in mist, blanket fog or overheat the brakes. – During the winter season, even
5 when there is the possibility of banks – Never coast downhill with the apparently dry roads can have icy
of fog: engine off or in neutral, and never sections. Be careful when crossing
– Keep a moderate speed. with the ignition key removed. bridges, viaducts and roads that
have little exposure to the sun and
– Even in the daytime, turn on the low – Drive at a moderate speed, avoid
are bordered by trees and rocks.
beams, the front and rear fog lights. "cutting" corners.
They may be icy.
Do not use the high beams. – Remember that passing other
– Keep an ample safe distance from
– Remember that fog creates vehicles when driving uphill is slower
the vehicles in front of you.
dampness on the asphalt and thus and thus requires more free distance
any type of maneuver is more on the road. If you are being
difficult and braking distances are overtaken on a hill, slow down and
extended. allow the other vehicle to pass.
– Keep a safe distance from the vehicle
in front of you.
– Avoid sudden changes in speed as
much as possible.

176 Driving conditions


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 177 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Emission control devices but reduce the engine performance Also, specific to these vehicles is the
required to a minimum and contact fuel filler neck which comes equipped
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer with a sealed plug that is grounded to
Even if the vehicle is fitted with air
as soon as possible. avoid possible sparking during re-
quality devices, the environment
Never run the engine, even if only for fueling. These devices allow the
deserves the utmost respect from every
testing, with one or more spark plugs vehicle to be classified in the LEV. 1
one of us.
disconnected. homologation category.
By following a few simple rules, the
Do not warm up the engine making it
driver can avoid damaging the
idle before starting off, apart from Failure to comply with these
environment and very often can
when the external temperature is very rules can originate fire
reduce fuel consumption as well.
low and, even then, for no longer than hazards.
In this regard, some useful information
30 seconds.
is listed here below; please read the Engine exhaust, some of its
following carefully. constituents, and certain
During normal operation, the
The correct operation of the air quality vehicle components contain
catalytic converter generates
devices not only helps to ensure or emit chemicals known to the State
high temperatures. Do not,
respect for the environment, but also therefore, park the vehicle on of California to cause cancer and birth
affects vehicle efficiency.
Keeping these devices in good
flammable materials (grass, dry defects and reproductive harm. In 5
leaves, pine needles, etc.): risk of fire. addition, certain fluids contained in
working conditions is the first rule for vehicles and certain products of
driving both ecologically sound and Do not install heat guards and do not component wear contain or emit
economically. remove those already fitted to the chemicals known to the State of
The first precaution is to follow the catalytic converter and to the exhaust California to cause cancer and birth
Maintenace Schedule precisely. manifold. defects or other reproductive harm.
Always use unleaded fuel. Do not spray anything on the catalytic
If starting is difficult, do not make converter, oxygen sensor and exhaust
prolonged attempts. manifold.
Especially avoid push starts, towing or In addition to specific catalytic and pre-
hill starts: these are all maneuvers that catalytic converters, the vehicles are
can damage the catalytic converters. equipped with a system for controlling
For any emergency starting, only use fuel vapor emissions. This system,
an auxiliary battery. called ORVR, has been designed to
When driving, if the engine starts help reduce atmospheric pollution by
"running poorly", continue driving, the evaporation from the fuel system.
Emission control devices 177
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 178 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Other advices – If the vehicle is stopped for long


– Do not warm up the engine with the periods, turn the engine off.
vehicle stationary: in these – Check tire pressure regularly: if the
conditions the engine heats up much pressure is too low, fuel
more slowly and increases fuel consumption increases and the tires
consumption and emissions. It is may be damaged.
much better to move off slowly, – Do not transport unnecessary
avoiding high engine speeds. objects left in the luggage
– As soon as traffic conditions and the compartment. The weight of the
route permit it, use a higher gear. vehicle affects fuel consumption
– Avoid pressing the accelerator considerably.
repeatedly when stopped at traffic – Use the electrical devices only as
lights or before turning off the long as necessary. The power
engine. required increases fuel consumption.
– Keep your speed as even as possible,
avoiding unnecessary braking and
5 accelerations, which cause fuel
consumption and increase exhaust
emissions.

178 Emission control devices


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 179 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Parking running, the accelerator pedal is WARNING: When you need to park the
depressed. vehicle on a steep slope, both with the
When the parking brake is applied, the engine on and off, it is recommended
Pull the handbrake, straighten the
warning light PARK illuminates and not only engage the parking brake but
wheels and switch off the engine. also to shift the gearshift lever to P
the message EPB ON is displayed.
Never leave the ignition key in the (PARK) before leaving the vehicle.
During engagement and
MAR (ON) position.
disengagement procedures, the
Always remove the key when getting
warning light PARK flashes until the Pressing the EPB button while
out of the vehicle.
parking brake has reached its driving will cause the vehicle
maximum activation force and until it to slow down with a sharp
Never leave children
is fully released. deceleration (Dynamic Braking). We
unattended in the vehicle.
In the above mentioned conditions, therefore recommend that you use
the automatic engagement function this feature only in the event of an
can be deactivated/activated by emergency. In any case, vehicle
pressing the button A on the stability is ensured by the MSP system,
Do not park the vehicle on
dashboard. which is always active.
paper, grass, dry leaves or
other flammable materials.
They could catch fire if they come into
Always hold the brake pedal 5
depressed during
contact with hot parts of the exhaust
engagement or Engagement
system.
disengagement of the parking brake. The parking brake is automatically
engaged when the engine is turned off
Do not leave the engine
and the vehicle is stationary.
running with the vehicle
It can only be disengaged when the
unattended.
engine is restarted.
If the key has been removed or is in
Electric parking brake
position STOP, it cannot be
The vehicle is equipped with an disengaged.
automatic parking brake, referred to A The parking brake can also be
as EPB (Electric Parking Brake). manually engaged when the vehicle is
It is automatically engaged when the moving or the key is in the MAR (ON)
engine is turned off and it is position, by raising the lever B.
disengaged when, with the engine If the engine was turned off when the
automatic engagement device was
Parking 179
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 180 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

deactivated, its operation can be Disengagement Deactivating PARK OFF automatic


resumed simply by pulling the lever B The parking brake is automatically operation
upward. The message EPB ON will be disengaged by depressing the brake To deactivate automatic operation of
displayed. pedal and moving the gearshift lever the parking brake, start the engine
from position P (a pressure of at least 5 and press the button A on the
Always check that the vehicle bar must be generated inside the dashboard. The message PARK OFF
is actually locked before braking system), or by pushing the appears on the display for 5 seconds,
leaving it. accelerator pedal with a gear after which it remains displayed in
engaged. smaller letters.
When the vehicle is moving or the key To reactivate automatic operation,
is in the MAR position, the parking press the button B again and the
brake can also be manually message PARK ON will be displayed for
disengaged by pulling the lever B 5 seconds.
upward and simultaneously depressing
the service brake pedal.

WARNING: If you attempt to


5 disengage the parking brake without
having depressed the service brake
pedal, a message will be displayed to
warn you to do so.

WARNING: In certain conditions, it is


however advisable to disengage the
parking brake manually and slightly
apply the service brake for starting off.
This is advisable when there are
obstacles very close to the vehicle in
the direction in which you intend to A
move.

180 Parking
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 181 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

WARNING: In certain conditions when – Parking brake fault go to dealer you need to manually release the
the battery voltage is low, the electric Slowly drive to the nearest Authorized parking brake using the special tool
parking brake system may temporarily Maserati Dealer and remember that provided in the toolkit.
be deactivated for safety reasons. the electric parking brake is not To do this, proceed as follows:
Therefore, typically upon starting the functioning – Remove the panel that covers the
engine, when the battery voltage spare wheel compartment in the
– EPB is overheated
drops, the message PARK OFF may luggage compartment.
temporarily be displayed, indicating Turn off the engine for about 15
minutes and do not use the parking – Remove the cap on the right-hand
that automatic operation is
brake. If the warning light comes on side of the EPB ECU.
temporarily disabled.
again when restarting the engine, – Insert the special tool in its seat.
WARNING: In case of performance slowly drive to the nearest Authorized – Turn the handle clockwise until
starts, check that the electric parking Maserati Dealer. release
brake is deactivated. – EPB fault, only manual EPB release – Remove the tool from its seat and
possible: see handbook close it with the cap.
Malfunction indication
Follow the manual emergency
In the event of a failure of the
deactivation procedure in order to After each manual emergency
automatic parking brake system, the 5
release the parking brake. release, the electric parking
warning light ! on the instrument
– Parking brake system revision go to brake system remains
panel and on the display illuminates.
dealer inefficient and must be repaired by a
Depending on the faults found, the Authorized Maserati Dealer to resume
warning light is accompanied by the The device pads have reached their
operation.
following messages: wear limit: Contact your Authorized
Maserati Dealer to have the system
malfunction corrected.

In the event of an EPB failure,


take your vehicle to the
nearest Authorized Maserati
Dealer as soon as possible.

Emergency disengagement
In the event that the electric parking
brake locks with a total system failure,
Parking 181
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 182 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Tires – "PSI": Pounds per square inch, a – "Recommended inflation pressure":


standard unit of air pressure. Inflation pressure, established by
– "B-pillar": The structural member at Maserati which is based on the type
Tire tread wear must be
the side of the vehicle, behind the of tires that are mounted on a
checked regularly and worn
front door. vehicle at the factory. This inflation
tires must be replaced.
pressure is affected by the number of
– "Bead area of the tire": Area of the
occupants in the vehicle, the amount
Glossary of tire terminology tire next to the rim.
of cargo and the speed at which the
– "Tire Information Placard (label)": a – "Side wall of the tire": Area vehicle will be driven for a
placard/label, showing the OE between the bead area and the prolonged period. This information
(original equipment) tire sizes, tread. can be found on the tire inflation
recommended inflation pressure, – "Tread area of the tire": Area of the placard (label) located on the
and the maximum weight the tire perimeter that contacts the road driver's side B-pillar and in the tire
vehicle can carry. when mounted on the vehicle. inflation table in this owners
– "Tire Identification Number (TIN)": A – "Rim": The metal support (wheel) manual.
number on the side wall of each tire for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
providing information about the tire upon which the tire beads are Tire identification number:
5 brand and manufacturing plant, tire seated. On the left hand sidewall as fitted to
size and date of manufacture. – "Cold tire pressure": The tires are the car. Commences with DOT
– "Inflation pressure": A measure of considered to be cold when they (Department of Transportation)
the amount of air in a tire. have the same temperature as the followed by a two digit manufacturing
– "Standard load": A class of P-metric surrounding (ambient air) meaning plant code, a two digit tire size code, a
or Metric tires designed to carry a that the car has been stationary for a three digit tire construction code, and
maximum load at a specified psi minimum of 3 hours, or has been a four digit date code for the week and
rating. driven less than 1 mile. Adjust year of production.
pressures only in ambient conditions.
– "Extra load": A class of P-metric or
metric tires designed to carry a – "Maximum inflation pressure": Is the
heavier maximum load at a specified greatest amount of air pressure that
psi rating. should ever be put in the tire. This
rating is established by th tire
– "kPa": Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
manufacturer. Use only the
pressure.
recommended inflation pressure.

182 Tires
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 183 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

DOT Quality Grades Temperature


The temperature grades are "A" (the
Tires Tread wear Traction Temperature highest), "B", and "C", representing
the tire resistance to the generation of
Michelin Pilot Sport (*) 220 AA A heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
(*) Example only conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
Treadwear Traction temperature can cause the tire to
The treadwear grade is a comparative The traction grades, from highset to deteriorate and can reduce tire life. In
rating based on the wear rate of the lowest, are “AA”, “A”, “B”, and “C”. addition, excessive temperature can
tire when tested under controlled Those grades represent the tire’s ability lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
conditions on a specified government to stop on wet pavement as measured "C" corresponds to a level of
test course. under controlled conditions on performance which all passenger car
For example, a tire graded 150 would specified government test surfaces of tires must meet under the Federal
wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as asphalt and concrete. Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
"B" and "A" represent higher levels of
well on the government course as a
performance on the laboratory test 5
tire graded 100. The traction grade assigned to
The relative performance of tires this tire is based on straight- wheel than the minimum required by
depends upon the actual conditions of ahead braking traction tests, law.
their use and may depart significantly and does not include acceleration,
from the norm due to variations in cornering, hydroplaning, or peak The temperature grade for
traction characteristics this tire is established for a tire
driving habits, service practices and
that is properly inflated and
differences in road characteristics and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
climate.
underinflation or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

Tires 183
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 184 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Other tire markings (GVWR). The GVWR includes the between axles is not permissible.
weight of the car, occupants, fuel and Failure to adhere to this requirement
Manufacturer name
lug gage. Never exceed the GVWR or will adversely affect the handling of
tire model. the car and may result in an accident in
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Size information for either the front or rear axle. The which you or others could be killed or
Example: maximum load which may be carried in seriously injured.
245 = nominal section width in mm. the rear luggage compartment is 66 lbs
35 = height of tire cross-section (30 Kg). Importance of proper inflation
expressed as percentage of width
pressure
Note that the Quattroporte is not – Use a good quality tire pressure
R = radial construction
designed to tow a trailer, and no such gauge and always replace the tire
20 = rim diameter in inches. attempt should be made. valve dust cap to prevent the ingress
ZR = speed rating indicating the speed of dirt and moisture into the valve,
at which the tire can carry the load WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR, which could cause leakage. Many
corresponding to the load capacity or front or rear GAWR. Exceeding gas stations provide tire inflation
index. these limits may cause unstable facilities.
handling or car or tire damage which
– The tires should be regularly
5 Tire placard/label could cause a crash in which you or
inspected for signs of cuts, abrasions
The tire and loading Information label others could be seriously injured or
or other dam age, and for any
stuck on the driver's door jamb killed.
uneven tread wear patterns. Uneven
specifies the correct size and pressure Information on tire care, including
treadwear may indicate that the
of tires to be used on the maintenance and safety practices can
suspension geometry or dampers
Quattroporte. It also specifies the total also be found on page 252; tire and
require attention from your dealer.
weight the car can carry, called the car wheel size information is on page 233
and the information on the tire – Overloading your tires can cause
capacity weight. This includes the
pressure monitoring system (tpms) can overheating as a result of too much
weight of driver, passenger and
be found on page 47. friction. You could have a blowout
luggage.
and a serious accident in which you
For tire pressure information, refer
WARNING: In order to achieve the could be killed or seriously injured.
also to 'Technical Data' section of this
optimum handling characteristics, the See 'Tire Placard Label'.
manual.
wheel and tire sizes on the – Underinflated tires pose the same
Also found on the driver's door jamb is
Quattroporte are different at the front danger as overloaded tires. The
the Certification label which stipulates
and at the rear. This means that resulting accident could cause
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
interchanging of wheels and tires serious injury, or death. Check all
184 Tires
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 185 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

tires frequently and maintain at the depth of tread, or with in correct tire "Steps for Determining Correct Load
recommended pressure. Tire pressures. Drivers should keep check Limit".
pressures should be checked only on tire wear and condition, and 1) Locate the statement "The
when the tires are cold. moderate their speed in adverse combined weight of occupants and
– Overinflated tires are more likely to weather conditions. cargo should never exceed XXX kg
be cut, punctured or broken by a or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
sudden impact - such as hit ting a Tire care placard.
pothole. Keep tires at the Wear indicators are molded into the 2) Determine the combined weight of
recommended pressure. bottom of the tread grooves at the driver and passengers that will
– Installing improper tires on your car intervals around the tire, indicated by be riding in your vehicle.
can affect handling and stability. This small pointers on the outer tread 3) Subtract the combined weight of
can cause a crash in which you can be blocks. The tires should be replaced the driver and passengers from XXX
killed or seriously injured. before being worn to this minimum kg or XXX lbs.
– Always use the size and type of tires legal tread depth. 4) The resulting figure equals the
recommended in this manual. available amount of cargo and
The cold tire pressures should be luggage load capacity. For example,
– Using incorrect tires or tires which checked every week, or every 1,000 if the "XXX" amount equals 1400
are excessively worn or improperly miles (1,700 km), whichever is the lbs. and there will be five 150 lb 5
inflated can cause a crash in which sooner, and corrections made as passengers in your vehicle, the
you can be killed or seriously injured. necessary. See 'Technical Data' at the amount of available cargo and
back of the handbook for tire luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
When driving on wet roads, surfac pressures. Underinflation will cause (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
water is squeezed out from between excessive wear, rapid deterioration of 5) Determine the combined weight of
the tire and road. However excessive the tire sidewalls and heavy steering, luggage and cargo being loaded on
speed or water depth can overwhelm whereas overinflation results in a hard the vehicle. That weight may not
the water clearing capability of the ride and in creased susceptibility to tire safely exceed the available cargo
tread and lead to a condition called damage. Both conditions will cause a and luggage load capacity
'aquaplaning' or 'hydroplaning', degradation in the handling qualities. calculated in Step 4.
where the tire rides on a film of water
6) If your vehicle will be towing a
and provides little or no grip on the Vehicle load limits: trailer, load from your trailer will be
road surface, leading to a loss of transferred to your vehicle. Do not
Federal regulations require the
control. This condition is more likely to however use the vehicle for trailer
following statement in this manual:
occur with worn tires having little towing.

Tires 185
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 186 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Winter tires Fit identical (manufacturer WARNING: Before purchasing or using


and tread) tires on all four snow chains, we recommend that you
These tires are specially designed for
wheels, in order to ensure to contact your local Authorized
driving on snow and are fitted to
safe driving, braking and good Maserati Dealer for information.
replace the ones supplied with the
maneuverability.
vehicle.
WARNING: Keep a moderate speed
Remember that the direction when chains are fitted on the tires. Do
Use only winter tires of the
of tire rotation should not be not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). Avoid
size and brand prescribed.
reversed. holes in the road, do not drive over
steps or sidewalks and do not drive on
Your local Authorized Maserati Dealer Snow chains long stretches without snow. This will
prevent damage to the vehicle and the
is available to provide suggestions as The use of snow chains is subject to the
roadway.
to the types of tires most suited to the regulations in force in each country.
use foreseen by the Customer. Use snow chains of reduced
For the type of tires to use, inflation dimensions, with a maximum
pressures and relative specifications protrusion of 0.35 in (9 mm) beyond
for winter tires, carefully follow the the tire tread.
indications found in the section The chains should be fitted only on the
"Capacities and technical driving wheel tires (rear wheels).
specifications". Check the chain tension after driving
The features of these tires are for a distance of about 164 ft (50
significantly reduced in winter when meters) with the chains fitted.
tread depth is less than 0.16 in (4 mm.) Deactivation of the MSP system is
In this case, they should be replaced. advised when chains are fitted on the
The specific features of the winter tires tires. Press the MSP-OFF button, the
lead to lower performance under LED on the same button will be on.
normal environmental conditions or
on long highway trips, compared to Snow chains: brand/type
the standard tires. Konig/SUPER MAGIC
Therefore, their use should be limited
to the performance for which they
have been type-approved. Rear tire
285/40 ZR18

186 Tires
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 187 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Useful accessories to keep


on-board
Regardless of the legal provisions in
force, we would recommend that you
keep in the vehicle:
– first aid kit containing alcohol-free
disinfectant, sterile gauze pads,
gauze rolls, bandages, etc.;
– flashlight;
– blunt-tipped scissors;
– heavy-duty gloves.
The objects described and other
essential objects can be obtained from
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer.
5

Useful accessories to keep on-board 187


Cap6_FOTO.fm Page 188 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:17 PM

188
Cap6_FOTO.fm Page 189 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:17 PM

In an emergency

Emergency starting 190


Toolkit 191
If a tire gets a puncture 192
If an exterior light goes out 199
If an interior light goes out 202
If a fuse blows 205
If the battery is flat 216
If you have to jack up the vehicle 217
If you have to tow the vehicle 218
In the event of an accident 219

189
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 190 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Emergency starting 4) As soon as the displayed number of If the OBDII warning light remains
flashing is equal to the first digit of on, turn the key to the STOP position
your CODE CARD, depress the and repeat the procedure from step 1.
If the MASERATI CODE fails to
accelerator and keep it pressed This procedure can be repeated an
deactivate the engine immobilizer, the
down until the OBDII warning unlimited number of times.
warning light CODE will light up
light goes off, after being lit on for
with a fixed light, the OBDII
approximately 4 seconds; you can WARNING: After an emergency start,
warning light will go out after 18
now release the accelerator pedal. we recommend that you contact your
seconds and then will come on
5) The OBDII warning light starts local Authorized Maserati Dealer,
immediately and the engine will not otherwise you will have to perform the
start. To start the engine, it is flashing again. As soon as the
displayed number of flashing is emergency start procedure every time
necessary to follow the emergency the engine is started.
start procedure. equal to the second digit of your
CODE CARD, press down the
WARNING: We recommend that you accelerator pedal and keep it
carefully read the entire procedure pressed.
before carrying it out. If you make a 6) Proceed in the same manner for the
mistake, you should turn the ignition remaining digits in the code on the
key to STOP and repeat the operations CODE CARD.
from the beginning (step 1). 7) When the last digit has been
entered, keep the accelerator pedal
6 1) Read the 5-digit electronic code pressed down. The OBDII
found on the CODE CARD. warning light comes on for 4
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR (ON): seconds and then goes off; you can
the CODE and OBDII now release the accelerator pedal.
warning lights are on. 8) A quick flashing of the OBDII
3) Press the accelerator pedal fully warning light (about 4 seconds)
down and keep it pressed. confirms that the operation has
Approximately 8 seconds later, the been carried out correctly.
OBDII warning light goes off. 9) Start the engine turning the key
Release the accelerator and get from MAR (ON) to AVV (START).
ready to count the number of times
the OBDII warning light flashes.

190 Emergency starting


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 191 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Toolkit The toolkit contains the following:


– 8 + 10 mm open end wrench
The vehicle is equipped with the – 13 +17 mm open end wrench
following tools: – double screwdriver
– toolkit, located in the luggage (flat + phillips head)
compartment – tow hook
– tire repair kit – tool for electric parking brake
– reflecting triangle actuator release.
– box with electric compressor, jack
and tools for fitting the spare wheel
(optional), located inside the spare
wheel itself.

Toolkit 191
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 192 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If a tire gets a puncture sockets housed in the ashtray, then fit WARNING: If the minimum pressure
the coupling E. can not be reached, do not drive the
Start the vehicle engine (see vehicle; contact the nearest
Precautions in the event of a page 150). Authorized Maserati Dealer.
puncture Press the Fix&Go power switch F to the
If a tire is punctured, you can make a “I” position. The electric compressor When the correct pressure has been
first emergency repair using the special will be turned on, sealant and air will reached, start driving the vehicle to
Fix&Go kit located in the trunk. inflate the tire. uniformly distribute the sealant inside
Tire punctures of up to 7/32 inch Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure the tire.
(6 mm) can be repaired; the kit can be should be reached within 20 minutes. After 10 minutes, stop and check the
used in all weather conditions. If the pressure has not been reached tire pressure. If the pressure is below
Do not remove the foreign object from turn off and remove the Fix&Go, drive 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
the punchured tire, e.g., screw or nail. the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back vehicle, as the tire is too damaged,
Remove the special Fix&Go kit from and forth, to better distribute the contact the nearest Authorized
the vehicle, take it out from the bag sealant inside the tire. Maserati Dealer.
and place it near the punchured tire. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or
Screw the flexible vacuum filling hose the compessor directly to the tire valve above repeat the inflation process to
A onto the pneumatic valve B. Remove and repeat the inflation process. reach the correct tire pressure and
the cap C from the power socket continue driving.
positioned in the luggage
6 compartment or remove the cigarette
lighter D from one of two power

E
B D

D
A
E C E

192 If a tire gets a puncture


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 193 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Peel off the warning label G from the The sealant maybe harmful or WARNING: The sealant contained in
bottle and place it on the dashboard as irritant. Do not swallow, avoid the bottle in the Fix&Go kit may
a reminder to the driver that the tire contact with eyes & skin. In damage the sensor fitted inside the
has been treated with Fix&Go. case of contact rinse with plenty of wheel rim on vehicles equipped with
water. the tire pressure monitoring system. In
Do not drive over the speed Contact a physician in case of allergic these cases, always have the sensor
limit or exceed 65 mph (110 reaction. Keep the sealant away from replaced by your Authorized Maserati
km/h) whichever is less. Have children. Dispose of the used sealant Dealer.
the tire checked as soon as possible at canister at your local Authorized
an Authorized Maserati Dealer. Maserati Dealer.

WARNING: Replace the sealant


canister prior to the expiration date at
your Authorized Maserati Dealer.

F G

If a tire gets a puncture 193


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 194 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Spare wheel (emergency wheel - – Select P (PARK), then turn the key to – a wrench I for the wheel studs and
optional) position STOP. for the jack operation
– If necessary, turn on the hazard – a socket J, to be fitted on the wrench
With the spare wheel fitted, warning lights and position the to loosen the wheel studs and to
never exceed the maximum warning triangle at the prescribed operate the jack
speed of 50 mph (80 Km/h); distance.
when this limit is exceeded, the MSP – a jack K.
system deactivates, consequently WARNING: In the event of downhill or
jeopardizing the vehicle's stability, WARNING: If the vehicle is equipped
uneven roads, place wedges or other
road holding and braking. Avoid with a spare wheel, the repair kit is not
objects under the wheels, in order to
accelerating at full throttle, braking provided.
hold the vehicle.
sharply and cornering at high speeds. – Open the compressor cover and take
out the pipe with the pressure gauge
– Free the bag and remove it from the
On request, the vehicle can be fitted L and the with connector M for the
luggage compartment..
with a spare wheel (emergency wheel), power plug.
jack and tools for wheel replacement. Remove the spare wheel, the jack, the
– Unscrew the spare wheel's valve cap
The spare wheel is of a special type and compressor and the tools for wheel
and attach the inflation pipe union N
is housed in the luggage replacement.
on the valve.
compartment. The spare wheel is The box located inside the spare wheel
supplied deflated, for space-saving contains:
– an electric compressor H, including a
6 reasons, with an electric compressor to
pressure gauge and the union for
inflate it.
If a tire is punctured, proceed as inflating the spare wheel
follows:
– Stop the vehicle in safe place, where
O N
it does not represent a hazardous H I
situation for the road traffic and
where the wheel can be replaced
safely. The vehicle must be parked
on a level and firm ground. L
J
M
– Check that the electric parking brake
is applied. K

194 If a tire gets a puncture


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 195 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Remove the cap P from power socket WARNING: We recommend that you WARNING: The current plug is
positioned in the luggage check the tire pressure on the gauge powered only when the key is turned
compartment or remove the when the compressor is off, in order to to MAR (ON) and it can only be
cigarette lighter Q from one of the have a more accurate reading. connected to devices with a power
power sockets housed in the ashtray, absorption of 15A maximum (180W
then fit the coupling M. WARNING: Do not activate the power). Do not connect devices with a
– Turn the ignition key to MAR (ON) to compressor for more than 20 minutes: higher power absorption to the
supply power to the plug and risk of overheating! The compressor current plug. A prolonged power
activate the compressor by pressing has been designed for inflating the absorption can discharge the battery,
switch O. spare wheel only; do not use it to preventing the engine from being
inflate mattresses, rubber boats etc. started once again.
– Stop the compressor when the
pressure gauge L indicates 2.2 bar
(220 kPa – 31.9 psi), remove the – Fit the socket J onto the wrench I and
inflation pipe and reinstall the cap loosen the 5 fastening studs on the
on the valve. wheel to be replaced by about one
turn.

If a tire gets a puncture 195


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 196 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Take out the jack from the box and – Place the jack near the wheel to be – Make sure that the jack head is
open it partially. replaced, in one of the positions properly fitted into one of the
indicated below. special seats on the side member.

Failure to position the jack


correctly could result in the
vehicle dropping or damage
to the body when raised.

~25 cm ~20 cm
~10 in ~8 in

196 If a tire gets a puncture


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 197 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Insert the wrench onto the jack and – Turn the jack using the wrench to With the spare wheel fitted,
rotate it until the wheel rises a few lower the car and withdraw the jack. never exceed the maximum
inches off the ground. – Fully tighten the studs as shown in speed of 50 mph (80 km/h);
– Loosen the 5 studs completely and the illustration below, starting first exceeding this speed jeopardizes the
remove the wheel. with one stud and then with the one vehicle's stability, road holding and
diagonally opposite and so on. braking. Avoid accelerating at full
– Fit the spare wheel fixing it with the
throttle, braking sharply and
5 studs just removed.
The spare wheel is narrower cornering at high speeds.
WARNING: The spare wheel must be than the standard ones and
must be used only to travel The inflating pressure for the
fitted using the studs that fix the
the necessary distance to reach a spare wheel must be 2.2 bar
standard wheels.
service station, where the punctured (220 kPa - 31.9 psi).
tire can be repaired.
For safety reasons, it is
absolutely forbidden to travel
with more than one spare
wheel fitted on the vehicle at the same
time.

Snow chains cannot be fitted


on spare wheels. 6

The maximum total life of the


spare wheel is approximately
1,860 mi. (3,000 km).

3
1 5

4 2

If a tire gets a puncture 197


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 198 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Refitting the standard wheel Observe the tightening After refitting the standard
torque for the wheel studs wheel, check the tire pressure.
– Following the procedure described
(98 ± 10 Nm / 72 ± 7 ft. lbs).
before, lift the car and remove the
The jack can be used only to
spare wheel.
On completion of the operation: replace the wheels. It should
– Fit the standard wheel. never be used for repairs
– Thoroughly deflate the spare wheel,
– Snug the studs using the special exerting pressure on the valve under the vehicle.
wrench. through the protruding piece of the
– Lower the vehicle and remove the valve cap.
jack. – Position the jack and the wrench
– Fully tighten the studs following the with the bushing in their box and put
sequence indicated before. it back into the spare wheel.
– Place the spare wheel into its bag
and secure it inside the luggage
compartment.

The used wheel may soil the


mats, therefore protect them
if possible.
6

198 If a tire gets a puncture


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 199 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If an exterior light goes On the vehicles manufactured for the Taillight clusters
Japanese market, the DRL lights are The taillight bulbs are arranged as
out not operational; for all the other follows:
markets where by law they may not be
WARNING: Before replacing a light turned on, they can be deactivated G – Direction indicator light bulb
bulb, make sure that the through the Bose® Infotainment H – Position light bulb
corresponding fuse is intact. For system. J – Stop light LED
replacement, use only genuine new C – Side-marker light bulb K – Reverse light bulb
light bulbs having the same
D – High beam light bulb L – Rear fog light bulb
characteristics as the bulb to be
replaced. E – Direction indicator LED M – Side-marker LED
F – Fog light bulb
Headlight clusters
To access the headlight clusters from To replace the Xenon light
underneath the vehicle, you must first bulbs, the low and high beam
remove the wheel housing covering. light bulbs and to check the
The light bulbs of the headlight system, contact your local Authorized
clusters are arranged as follows: Maserati Dealer only: RISK OF
ELECTRICAL SHOCKS!
A – Bi-xenon low-beam/high-beam
bulb
B – Position and DRL bulb.
Due to the complexity of the 6
operation, we recommend that you
contact your local Authorized Maserati
Dealer for the replacement of all of the
A B light bulbs.
G H

C K J

L
E F D
M

If an exterior light goes out 199


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 200 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

To replace a light bulb: Direction indicator side lights 2) Take out the rear part of the
1) Lift the luggage compartment lid. To replace the side direction indicator indicator by releasing the retaining
2) Open the door on the covering tab Q and remove the unit.
light bulb (5W):
panel, in position with the light 3) Remove the bulb holder R turning it
1) Push the side direction indicator
cluster. in an anti-clockwise direction.
forward to press the spring clip P.
3) Pull the bulb holder N and remove it.
4) Remove the light bulb O and replace
it.
5) Refit the bulb holder N in its seat.
6) Close the door on the covering
panel.

N O
1
2
Q

R
200 If an exterior light goes out
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 201 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

4) Remove and replace the bulb S. Third stop light License plate lights
5) Refit the bulb holder turning it in a In order to replace the bulbs, the To replace the license plate light bulb
clockwise direction. optical unit has to be removed. It is (C 5W):
6) Refit the direction indicator therefore recommended that you 1) Remove the fastening screws for the
inserting first the retaining tab on contact your local Authorized Maserati transparent cover/bulb holder unit.
the rear part and then pressing the Dealer. 2) Remove the unit and replace the
front part until hearing the spring
bulb.
clip click in place.

WARNING: Proceed with care when


removing the side direction indicator
light, to avoid damages to the car body
or to the indicator itself.

If an exterior light goes out 201


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 202 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If an interior light goes 3) Refit the dome lamp inserting first Courtesy mirror light
the front side and the pushing the To replace the bulb (12V - 5W
out rear side into its seat. “torpedo” type):
WARNING: Before replacing a bulb, WARNING: When refitting the dome 1) Remove the fixing frame by prying it
ensure that the matching fuse is intact. light, make sure that the electric wires out gently at points D.
For replacement, use only original, are correctly positioned and do not 2) Replace the bulb.
new light bulbs having the same interfere with the dome light edges 3) Refit the frame by pressing it.
characteristics as the bulb to be and with the retaining tabs.
replaced.

Front and rear dome light


To replace the bulbs:
1) Use a screwdriver to gently pry it out
at points A and remove the dome
light.
2) Replace the bulb concerned by
rotating it:
– timed light B
6 – reading lights C.

A A B

C D
D

202 If an interior light goes out


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 203 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Glove compartment, glove box 2) Lift the cover F. 3) Replace the light bulb G.
and luggage compartment light 4) Refit the cover, inserting first the
To replace the bulb: two-tab side and then pressing on the
1) Remove the transparent cover by other side.
prying it out gently at point E with a
screwdriver.

If an interior light goes out 203


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 204 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Courtesy lights (below door) 2) Rotate the bulb holder L and take it 4) Refit the bulb holder L inserting first
To replace the bulb: out. the electrical connector side and
3) Replace the pressure-fitted bulb M. then pressing on the other side to
1) Use a screwdriver positioned at
hook up the clip.
point H to pry out the light fixing
frame.

L
M
H

204 If an interior light goes out


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 205 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If a fuse blows Replace the faulty fuse with a new one Position of fuses/relays
having the same rating (same color). The fuses/relays are located in various
If the fault recurs, contact your local parts of the vehicle:
Replacing the fuses Authorized Maserati Dealer.
When an electrical device fails to work, – In the right hand side of the engine
check that the matching fuse is intact. Never replace a blown fuse compartment.
A - Intact fuse. with anything other than a – Behind the cover on the left of the
B - Blown fuse. good fuse (same rating/color). steering wheel.
– In the right hand side of the luggage
compartment.

Fuse colors
A B dark brown red light yellow white green
yellow blue

Ampere A5 A7.5 A10 A15 A20 A25 A30

Maxi fuse colors


6
yellow green orange red blue

Ampere A20 A30 A40 A50 A60

If a fuse blows 205


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 206 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuses and relays in the engine The fuses/relays are housed in 3 control The list of fuses and relays is shown in
compartment boxes. the following pages.
To access the fuses/relays, lift the
engine compartment lid, remove the WARNING: If you need to wash the
covering panel A, then undo the 4 engine compartment, do not direct the
screws B to remove the cover C. jet of water on the engine
compartment ECU.

F92
F91
F90
F89
F88
T15

F97
F96
F95
F94
F93
T20 T17
T19 T14
F11
F17
F22
F08
F85
T10
T05

T09
T08
T31
6
T03
T07 T06 T30 T02

A C

F07
F01
F04
F05
F06
F83
F03
F82
F81
F02
F19
F14
F10
F15
F18
F23
F30
F21
F09
F84
F20
F16
F24
F87
B

F102
F101
F100
F99
F98
T16

F107
F106
F105
F104
F103
206 If a fuse blows
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 207 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Engine compartment relay


Pos. Type Function
T02 Micro 20 A DRL relay
T03 Micro 20 A Spot light relay
T05 Micro 20 A CLA relay
T06 Micro 20 A Horns relay
T07 Maxi 50 A I.E. main relay
T08 Micro 20 A Air conditioning system compressor relay
T09 Micro 20 A High-beam relay
T10 Micro 20 A Glove compartment motor relay
T14 Micro 20 A Fog light relay
T15 Maxi 50 A Radiator electric fan - 1st speed relay
T16 Maxi 50 A Radiator electric fan - 2nd speed relay
T17 Micro 30 A Immobilizer relay (only Quattroporte version)
T19 Micro 20 A Ignition enable relay
6
T20 Micro 30 A Ignition relay
T30 Maxi 50 A Air pump relay
T31 Micro 30 A Headlight washer pump relay

Engine compartment fuses


Pos. Amp. Colours System / Component
F01 Maxi 40 A Orange +30 relay - fan 1
F02 Maxi 30 A Green +30 ABS valves
F03 Maxi 20 A Yellow +30 Relay T03 spot lights

If a fuse blows 207


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 208 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Pos. Amp. Colours System / Component


F04 Maxi 40 A Orange +30 ABS pump
F05 Maxi 40 A Orange +30 A.C. Node
F06 Maxi 60 A Blue +30 relay - fan 2
F07 30 A Green +30 relay T07 - I.E. main
F08 7.5 A Brown +30 relay T08 - Air conditioner compressor
F09 7.5 A Brown +30 relay T05 - CLA
F10 15 A Light blue +30 Relay T06 - Horns
F11 10 A Red LH high beam
F14 7.5 A Brown NQS
F15 15 A Light blue +30 alternator sensing
F16 10 A Red LH spot light power supply
F17 10 A Red RH high beam
F18 7.5 A Brown +30 I.E. bank
F19 15 A Light blue +30 relay T02 - DRL lights
6
F20 15 A Light blue +30 relay T10 - Glove compartment motor
F21 15 A Light blue +30 relay T14 - Fog lights
F22 - -
F23 10 A Red +30 ABS electronics
F24 10 A Red RH spot light power supply
F30 30 A Green +30 Relay T20 - Ignition
F81 Maxi 50 A Red CPL2
F82 - -
F83 Maxi 50 A Red +30 Air pump relay

208 If a fuse blows


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 209 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Pos. Amp. Colours System / Component


F84 20 A Yellow +30 Ignition switch
F85 30 A Green Headlight washer power supply
F87 - -
F88 15 A Light blue +main relay, injectors/cylinder coils 1-4
F89 15 A Light blue +main relay, injectors/cylinder coils 5-8
F90 15 A Light blue +main relay I.E. secondary connected devices
F91 10 A Red +main relay, I.E. ECU
F92 15 A Light blue +main relay, oxygen sensors
F93 7.5 A Brown INT roof inside panel utilities
F94 7.5 A Brown INT NCS
F95 7.5 A Brown INT CSG
F96 7.5 A Brown INT alternator
F97 10 A Red INT I.E. ECU
F98 - -
6
F99 - -
F100 - -
F101 - -
F102 - -
F103 - -
F104 - -
F105 - -
F106 - -
F107 - -

If a fuse blows 209


cap6_usa.fm Page 210 Tuesday, October 7, 2008 10:21 AM

Fuses and relays in the passenger The fuses/relays are housed in 2 control The list of fuses and relays is shown in
compartment, to the left of the boxes. the following pages.
steering wheel
To access the fuses/relays, undo the
two screws D, then remove the panel E
pushing it downward, pressing on the
points indicated.

F-36 F-52 F-45 F-46 F-34


F-39 F-41 F-47 F-33 F-48
F-38 F-43 F-32 F-37 F-49
6 F-53 F-40 F-50 F-42 F-35
F-31 F-44 F-51 F-12 F-13

T12
T01
T13
T11

E
D

210 If a fuse blows


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 211 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Relays in the passenger compartment, on the left of the steering wheel


Pos. Type Function
T01 Micro-relay 20A Low beams
T11 Micro-relay 30A Heated rear window
T12 Micro-relay 30A Connected devices 1 (controlled by INT/A ignition switch)
T13 Maxi-relay 50A Connected devices 2 (controlled by BC Body Computer)

Fuses inside the passenger compartment, to the left of the steering wheel
Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component
F12 15A Light blue Right-hand low beam
F13 15A Light blue Left-hand low beam/CAF (Headlights ECU) enable
F31 7.5A Brown INT/A For A.C. unit, NBC (Body Computer Node)
F32 10A Red Rear dome lights, step lights, luggage compartment lights, front dome light
F33 20A Yellow NVB (luggage compartment node) power supply 1
F34 20A Yellow NVB 2 (luggage compartment node) power supply 2
6
+15 SCC (Cruise Control Satellite), NAC (Cruise Control Adaptive Node), CLA (Stop lights
F35 7.5A Brown
Control ) (NC)
F36 10A Red +30 (preset position)
+15 CLA (Stop Lights Control) (NA), third stop, NQS (Instrument Panel Node), CAF
F37 10A Red
(Headlights ECU)
F38 15A Light blue Reverse lights
+30 for NIM (Inside Roof Node), Bose® Infotainment (IT Node), NCL (Air Conditioning
F39 10A Red and Heating System Node), OBDII Diagnostics Socket, CSA (Alarm System Siren Ecu),
CAV (MOtion-sensing Alarm Ecu)
F40 30A Green Heated rear window

If a fuse blows 211


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 212 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component


F41 15A Light blue Windshield/rear window washer nozzles, heated windshield (preset position)
F42 7.5 Brown +15 NFR (Brake System Node)
F43 30A Green Windshield wiper/washer (Connected Devices Relay INT/A)
Cigarette lighter - power socket inside luggage compartment, dashboard power socket
F44 20A Yellow
(connected devices relay INT/A)
F45 25A White Electromagnets for headrest recline
F46 15A Light blue Rear window sunshade motor
F47 20A Yellow NPG Power Supply (driver's door node)
F48 20A Yellow NPP Power Suppy (passenger's door node)
F49 7.5A Brown +15 for NVO (SteerinG Wheel Node), NCS (Suspensions Control Node), NSP (Parking
Sensors Node), CSG (Power Steering ECU), NTV (TV Node), CSP (Twilight/rain Sensor
ECU), Internal Mirror, NIM (Inside Roof Node), LH Bose® Infotainment Control Panel (IT
Node), LH Control Panel On Dashboard, AQS, Fog Sensor, CTA (Sunroof ECU)
F50 7.5A Brown Airbag system

6 F51 7.5A Brown +15 Windshield wiper controls, NCA (Automatic Gearbox Node)
F52 15A Light blue Front seats heating (Connected Devices Relay INT/A)
F53 10A Red Rear fog light

212 If a fuse blows


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 213 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Relay/fuse boxes inside the There are 2 relay and fuse boxes. To access the fuses and relays inside the
luggage compartment control boxes, remove the covers by
To access the fuses/relays, open the levering up the fastening tabs.
covering panel F on the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment,
levering up the fastening tabs G.

F54 F55
F63 F57
F56
T21 F67
F62
F60
F69
F77
6
F78 T22 T24 F79
F61 F58
T34 T35
F65 F68
G F F66 T23 T25 F59
F80 F64
T32 T33

F27 F53
F26 F29
F25 F28

If a fuse blows 213


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 214 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Relays inside the luggage


compartment
Pos. Type Function
T21 Maxi 50 A Rear connected devices relay
T22 - -
T23 Micro 20 A Side marker relay
T24 Micro 20 A Third stop relay
T25 Micro 20 A Fuel tank door relay
T32 Micro 30 A Key-Lock solenoid
T33 Micro 30 A Rear seat heating
T34 Micro 30 A Fuel pump 1
T35 Micro 30 A Fuel pump 2

Fuses inside the luggage compartment


Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component
6 F25 10 A Red +30 T32 key-lock solenoid
F26 20 A Yellow +30 T33 rear seat heating
F27 20 A Yellow +30 T34, T35 fuel pumps
F28 - -
F29 - -
F53 - -
F54 30 A Green +30 Hi-Fi amplifier
F55 30 A Green Driver’s seat movement (from T21)
F56 10 A Red +30 NAG, NTV, Bose® tuner, NIT (Japan)
F57 30 A Green Passenger seat movement (from T21)

214 If a fuse blows


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 215 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component


F58 7.5 A Brown Front LH, rear RH side marker power supply from T23
F59 - -
F60 7.5 A Brown +30 NSP
F61 7.5 A Brown +30 T24 third stop
F62 20A Yellow +30 NCA
F63 15 A Light blue +30 fuel tank door T25 relay
F64 7.5 A Brown Front RH, rear LH side marker power supply from T23
F65 20 A Yellow +30 NPP, NPG, NVB locks
F66 20 A Yellow +30 sunroof
F67 30 A Green Rear LH seat movement (from T21)
F68 - -
F69 30 A Green Rear RH seat movement (from T21)
F77 20 A Yellow Power socket on armrest (from T21)
F78 20 A Yellow +30 power socket
6
F79 7.5 A Brown Rear seat movement (from T21)
F80 25 A White +30 bass box

If a fuse blows 215


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 216 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If the battery is flat Charging the battery 4) Switch on the charger.


You are advised to charge the battery 5) When the battery is recharged, turn
First of all, we recommend that you slowly and at a low amperage for off the charger before disconnecting it
read the precautions contained in the about 24 hours. from the battery.
section ”Maintenance“ to prevent the Follow the below instructions: 6) Reconnect the terminals to the
battery from running flat and to help 1) Deactivate the electronic alarm battery poles, observing the polarity.
ensure its long life. system using the remote control.
WARNING: First reconnect the positive
2) Open the luggage compartment
Starting with an auxiliary terminal (+) and then the negative
and remove the panel on the right-
battery hand side, then disconnect the electric
one (–).
See the chapter ”Starting the engine“ system terminals from the battery
The fluid contained in the
on page 150 in the section ”Using the poles.
battery is poisonous and
vehicle“.
corrosive. Avoid contact with
WARNING: First disconnect the
the skin and eyes. The battery
WARNING: Under no circumstance negative terminal (–) then the positive
charging procedure must be carried
should a battery charger be used for an one (+).
out in a ventilated environment, away
emergency start: you could damage
from open flames or possible sources
the electronic systems, particularly the 3) Connect the charger cables to the of sparks: risk of explosion and fire.
control units which manage the battery poles.
6 ignition and fuel supply functions.
Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

216 If the battery is flat


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 217 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If you have to jack up the The jack can be used only to


replace the wheels. Under no
vehicle circumstance should it be used
for repairs under the vehicle.
Using the jack
See the chapter “If a tire gets a
puncture”, in this section.

~25 cm ~20 cm
~10 in ~8 in

If you have to jack up the vehicle 217


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 218 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If you have to tow the Tow the vehicle using the towing hook When towing the vehicle,
found in the toolkit. Screw the towing make sure that you observe
vehicle hook down tightly in its seat, on the the road traffic regulations
lower, right-hand side of the front concerning both the towing device
If you need to tow the vehicle, observe bumper. and driving conduct.
the following recommendations: In order to tow the vehicle, turn the
– if possible, have the vehicle key to MAR and engage neutral by When towing the vehicle with
transported on a vehicle specific for shifting the gearshift lever A to N. the engine off, remember
roadside assistance and recovery. If the electronic parking brake (EPB) is that, without the assistance of
applied, you must release it, see on the brake servo, a stronger effort is
If this is not possible:
page 179. required on the brake pedal for
– tow the vehicle by raising the driving braking and on the steering wheel for
wheels (rear). WARNING: If you have to tow the steering.
If also this solution is not practicable: vehicle with 2 wheels raised, make sure
– tow the vehicle for by raising the that the ignition key is in the STOP Screw down the towing hook
front of the vehicle a distance of less position. If this is not observed, when into its seat (approx. 11 turns).
than 60 mi (100 km) at a speed below the MSP is active, the ECU will store a Carefully clean the threaded
35 mph (60 km/h). malfunction and the relative warning seat before tightening the hook.
light will illuminate on the
Do not extract the key, as the instrument panel display. This requires
6 steering wheel will lock the intervention of your Authorized
automatically and you will be Maserati Dealer to reset the system.
unable to steer the wheels.

218 If you have to tow the vehicle


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 219 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

In the event of an accident – Call the emergency services, If there are injured persons
providing as much information as – Never leave the injured person
It is important to always stay calm. possible. On the highway, use a cell alone. Persons not directly involved
– If you are not directly involved, stop phone or the special call boxes, if in the accident are also required to
at a distance of at least ten yards provided. give assistance.
away from the accident area. – Remove the ignition key from the
– Do not crowd around injured
– If you are on a highway, stop vehicles involved.
persons.
without obstructing the emergency – If you smell fuel or other chemical
– Reassure the injured person that
lane. products, do not smoke and ask
help is on the way and stay close to
– Turn off the engine and switch on people around you to put their
him/her to help with possible panic
the hazard lights. cigarettes out.
attacks.
– At night, illuminate the accident To extinguish fires, even small ones, use
a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand or – Release or cut the seat belts
area with the headlights. restraining the injured persons.
earth. Never use water.
– Always act with caution: you should – Do not give the injured persons
If multiple accidents occurred on the
not risk someone crashing into you. anything to drink.
highways, particularly where visibility is
– Indicate that an accident has poor, there is a high risk of being – Never move an injured person.
occurred by placing the emergency involved in other collisions. Leave your
triangle in a well visible position and – Remove the injured person from the
vehicle immediately and move away
at the prescribed distance. vehicle only if there is a risk of fire,
from the area.
sinking in water or the vehicle 6
falling. When removing an injured
person, do not pull his/her limbs,
never bend his/her head and, as
much as possible, keep his/her body
in a horizontal position.

In the event of an accident 219


Cap7_FOTO.fm Page 220 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:19 PM

220
Cap7_FOTO.fm Page 221 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:19 PM

Capacities and technical specifications

Fuel Requirements 222


Engine oil 223
Fuel consumption 223
Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use 224
Technical specifications 226
Tire pressure 233

221
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 222 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuel Requirements detection of misfueling easier, possibly fuel you will be dispensing into your
resulting in emission test failure for vehicle contains alcohol or ethers, ask
misfueled vehicles. the fuel service station operator.
Octane Rating
Maserati engines are designed for
optimum performance on unleaded WARNING: Some U.S. & Canadian WARNING: Some geographical areas in
premium gasoline gasolines use an octane enhacing the U.S. and/or Canada, require the use
with an AKI octane rating of 91 or additive called Methy- of "oxygenated" fuels to meet
above. AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an Cyclopentadienyl Manganese seasonal air quality standards.
average of the Research Octane Tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are - Alcohol - Ethanol: Fuels containing
Number, RON, and the Motor Octane used your Emission Control System ONLY up to 10% ethanol by volume
Number, MON (RON + MON/2 gives performance may be affected, and the may be used (ethanol may also be
you the AKI). check engine light located on the referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or
instrument panel/cluster assembly may "Gasohol"
Unleaded Fuel illuminate (come ON). If the check - Ethers - MTBE: Fuel containing ONLY
engine light illuminates (comes ON), up to 15% MTBE may be used.
Maserati incorporates a catalytic
ensure to visit your authorized
converter system and you must only
Maserati dealer for vehicle service. WARNING: Do not use any gasoline
use unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
that contains lead as a knock inhibitor,
Canadian regulations require that
and DO NOT use lead additives. The
pumps delivering unleaded gasoline
be labelled "UNLEADED". Only these
Gasoline Containing Alcohol & use of Detergent gasoline is effective
Ethers ("Oxygenated Fuels"): in minimizing fuel injector and intake
pumps have nozzles which fit your
Some fuels in the U.S. and/or Canada, valve deposits. The use of external fuel
vehicle's fuel filler inlet. It is unlawful
7 to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle contain "oxygenates" which are injector cleaning systems/fluids is NOT
usually alcohols or ethers. In some recommended.
labelled "unleaded gasoline only".
Leaded gasoline damages the catalytic locations in the U.S. and/or Canada,
state or local laws require that the fuel Tank capacity: approx. 23.78 US gallon
converter and heated oxygen sensor
station fuel service pumps be clearly (90 litres), including a 4.7 US gallon (18
system. Repeated use of leaded
marked indicating use of alcohols or litre) reserve.
gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of
the emission control system and could ethers. Please be aware that in some
result in loss of emission warranty geographic areas fuel stations may
coverage. State and local vehicle have fueling pumps that are
inspection programs will make unmarked. If you are not sure if the

222 Fuel Requirements


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 223 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Engine oil Fuel consumption

To check the level, please see the The fuel consumption values shown in the following table were established
“Maintenance” section. based on homologation tests (your actual mileage may vary).
Do not top up with oil having
characteristics other than those of the
oil already used in the engine. Fuel consumption (m.p.g. (USA))
The gap between the MIN and MAX
City Highway
reference marks on the dipstick
corresponds to about 0.4 US gallon Version 13 19
(1.5 litres) of oil. Quattroporte
Use SAE 5W/40 API SL/CF and ACEA A3, Version 14.31 25.51
B3, B4 oil for fuel-powered engines. Quattroporte S

WARNING: The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving


style, general condition of the vehicle, outfitting/equipment/accessories in the
vehicle, use of the air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or
situations which may negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind
resistance and lead to consumption ratios differing from the reported ones.

Engine oil / Fuel consumption Engine oil 223


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 224 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use


Capacities and recommended products
Version Version
Parts to be refilled Quattroporte Quattroporte S Product specifications
Quantity
Fuel tank (including low fuel approximately 23.78 US gallon Premium gasoline with a minimum of 91 AKI.
sector) (90 litres)
Low fuel approximately
4.7 US gallon (18 litres)
Engine oil: Multigrade, fully synthetic lubricants with SAE 5W/40
grade, above the API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4
standards.
Oil type Shell Helix Ultra or Q-Horse Power 5W-40. Api
SM/CF Maserati approved
- periodic replacement 2.37 US gallon
(9.0 litres)
- top up from the MIN to the 0.4 US gallon WARNING: Do not top up with oil having characteristics
MAX level (1.5 litres) other than those of the oil already used.
WARNING: Engine oil consumption depends on the
7 driving style and the use of the car.
Windshield/headlight washer 1.72 US gallon (6.5 litres) Mix of water and windshield washer fluid, in the
fluid tank proportions indicated on the product package.
Windshield washer fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II
surfactants and alcohols. Type recommended: DP1.
WARNING: If the temperature is below -4 °F (-20 °C), use
windshield washer fluid.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

224 Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 225 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Version Version
Parts to be refilled Quattroporte Quattroporte S Product specifications
Quantity
Engine cooling circuit 3.43 US gallon (13 litres) Mix of water and coolant, in the proportions indicated
on the product package.
Coolant: Inhibited monoethylene glycol-based
protective fluid with anti-freezing action:
CUNA NC 956-16.
Type Shell Glycoshell
Hydraulic power steering - Oil type: ATF DEXRON II D LEV, SAE 10W.
Oil Type ATF Type A - MB 236.2 - ZF ML09/12
Shell Donax TM
Gearbox oil 2.65 US gallon (10.03 litres) Oil type: SHELL M1375.4 DEXTRON III
Differential oil 0.26 US gallon (1 litres) Oil type: SHELL SPIRAX S 75W140
Brake circuit and hydraulic - Synthetic fluid: NHTSA No. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925,
clutch control SAE J1703 J1704, CUNA NC 956-01.
SAE J1703, FMVSS No. 116 DOT 4 and ISO 4925
Type Shell Donax UB (DOT 4 Ultra)
Air conditioning and system’s 0.28 US gal 1,32 lb
coolant 0.13 +/-0.07 lb 0.13 +/-0.07 lb R134a (version Quattroporte)
(1.050 cc (600 gr R134a PAG RL 897 (version Quattroporte S) 7
60 +/-30gr) 60 +/-30gr)
Air conditioning and system’s 0.033 US gal
compressor oil 0.05 +/-0.003 US gal Type: SP 10 (Sanden) (version Quattroporte)
(125 cc Oil type: Ucon RL 897 (version Quattroporte S)
200 +/- 10 ml)
Specifications subject to change without notice.

Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use 225


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 226 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Technical specifications Injection – Ignition


The ignition and injection system is
Engine controlled by a single microprocessor
ECU. This enhances engine
General Version Version performance, improving the handling
Quattroporte Quattroporte S of the vehicle, and reduces fuel
Type code M139 A M139 R consumption, by optimizing engine
running with partial loads.
Cylinder number and position 8 - 90° V 8 - 90° V
Number of valves per cylinder 4 4 Injection
Version Quattroporte
Bore and stroke mm 92x79.8 94x84.5
– Type Bosch Motronic ME7.1.1.
Total displacement cm3 4,244 4,691
Version Quattroporte S
Compression ratio 11.058±0.2:1 11.02
– Type Bosch Motronic ME9.1.1.
kW 295 317
Maximum power (EC) Ignition
HP 396 425
– Static ignition
corresponding r.p.m. 7,100 7,000
– Ignition sequence: 1-8-6-2-7-3-4-5
Nm 452 490
Maximum torque (EC) – Ignition coil: ELDOR
kgm 46 50
Version Quattroporte
corresponding r.p.m. 4,750 4,750
– Spark plugs: NGK PMR8B.
7 Version Quattroporte S
– Spark plugs: NGK PMR8C-H.

Battery
– FIAMM 12V 100 Ah 850A

226 Technical specifications


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 227 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Alternator Gearshifting
Version Quattroporte Six forward speeds and one reverse.
– NIPPONDENSO 12V 150A Gear Gearbox ratios Total reduction ratios
Version Quattroporte S st
1 gear 4.171 14.77
– NIPPONDENSO SC2 12V 150A nd
2 gear 2.340 8.28
Lubrication system 3rd gear 1.521 5.38
The lubrication system is controlled by 4th gear 1.143 4.05
the wet sump system through an oil th
5 gear 0.867 3.07
pump and the relative suction screen, th
6 gear 0.691 2.45
incorporated in the crankcase.
Reverse 3.403 12.05
Cooling system
Engine cooling is ensured by an anti-
freeze mixture circulating inside a
circuit equipped with radiator,
centrifugal pump and expansion tank.

Transmission
Electro-hydraulically controlled
gearbox with 6 gears, torque
converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip 7
function.
Modular TRANSAXLE transmission
shaft.
Traction system equipped with rear
self-locking differential.

Technical specifications 227


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 228 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Differential Suspension Speed-sensitive steering


The ratios are: Front and rear Rack and pinion hydraulic steering,
Articulated quadrilateral suspension. with crankshaft-driven pump and
Differential reduction ratio tank. Articulated steering column,
Skyhook suspension with adjustable
13/46 = 3.54 damping with power absorption and adjustable
This system allows the driver to choose inclination and height. Speed-
Brakes two settings for the shock absorbers, sensitive, it gets more rigid as the
depending upon the roadway speed increases.
Service and emergency brakes
Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four conditions, speed and comfort. – Steering diameter = 40.4 ft (12.3 m)
wheels. – Steering wheel turns = 1.5 (to the
Two diagonally opposed and left and to the right)
independent hydraulic control circuits.
Vacuum brake servo.
4-channel ABS system with Electronic
Brake force Distributor (EBD).

Electric parking brake


The electric parking brake (EPB) acts on
the rear wheels.
It is activated manually, by lifting the
lever found in the center panel of the
center console, see on page 179.
7

228 Technical specifications


Cap7_usa.fm Page 229 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:12 PM

Wheels
Rims and tires
Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Wheel rim size Tire size Wheel rim size Tire size
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / /
front 8.5”J x 19” (+) 245/40 ZR19 8.5”J x 19” (+) 245/40 ZR19
8.5”J x 20” (+) 245/35 ZR20 8.5”J x 20” (+) 245/35 ZR20
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / /
rear 10.5”J x 19” (+) 285/35 ZR19 10.5”J x 19” (+) 285/35 ZR19
10.5”J x 20” (+) 295/30 ZR20 10.5”J x 20” (+) 295/30 ZR20
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 VR18 / /
*front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 / /
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 VR18 / /
*rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/40 VR19
* Winter tires
+ Wheel rims available on request

Technical specifications 229


Cap7_usa.fm Page 230 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:12 PM

Run Flat (optional)


Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Wheel rim size Tire size Wheel rim size Tire size
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / /
front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / /
rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19

Alternatively, winter tires having the same dimensions as those provided with the vehicle can be used .

The maximum speed reachable with winter tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the
regulations in force in the Country you are driving in.

WARNING: Subject to the prescribed dimensions, it is essential that tires of the same brand and type are fitted to all the
wheels in order to help ensure safe driving.
WARNING: Do not use tubes on Tubeless tires.

Spare wheel (emergency wheel - optional)


Alloy wheel rim.
7 Version Wheel rim size Tire size Tire brand
Quattroporte 6”J x 17” 185/60 R17 VREDESTEIN
Quattroporte S 6”J x 18” 175/55 R18 VREDESTEIN

230 Technical specifications


Cap7_usa.fm Page 231 Wednesday, September 24, 2008 3:56 PM

Snow chains
Maximum radial protrusion permitted over the tire profile: 9 mm.
Rear tire Snow chains: brand/type
285/40 ZR18 Konig/SUPER MAGIC

WARNING: The snow chains must be fitted only on rear tires. For purchasing snow chains, please contact your local
Authorized Maserati Dealer.

Performance
Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Maximum speed km/h mph km/h mph
270 168 280 174

The maximum speed reachable with winter tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the
regulations in force in the Country you are driving in.

Accelerations in Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S


standing starts (in seconds) 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
5.6 5.4
7

Weights
Weights Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Empty vehicle weight 4,425 lb (2.010 kg) 4,425 lb (2.010 kg)
(with tanks filled, tools and accessories)
Weight with full load 5,250 lb (2.385 kg) 5,250 lb (2.385 kg)
(5 persons plus luggage)

Technical specifications 231


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 232 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Dimensions

Luggage compartment volume (VDA standard): approx. 450 dm3

891 mm 3064 mm 1142 mm


35.1 in 120.6 in 44.9 in
5097 mm
200.6 in
1438 mm
56.6 in

1595 mm
1582 mm
62.8 in
62.3 in
1895 mm
74.6 in

232 Technical specifications


Cap7_usa.fm Page 233 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:12 PM

Tire pressure
Tire inflation pressure when cold (bar).

Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S Inflation pressure


Wheel rim size Tire size Wheel rim size Tire size When cold (Bar)
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / / 2.2
front 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 (+) 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 (+) 2.2
8.5”J x 20” 245/35 ZR20 (+) 8.5”J x 20” 245/35 ZR20 (+) 2.2
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / / 2.2
rear 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 (+) 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 (+) 2.2
10.5”J x 20” 295/30 ZR20 (+) 10.5”J x 20” 295/30 ZR20 (+) 2.0
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 VR18 / / 2.2
* front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 / /
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 VR18 / / 2.2
* rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/40 VR19 / /
spare wheel
6”J x 17” 185/60 R17 2.2
(emergency wheel)

* Winter tires
+ Tires available on request 7

Alternatively, winter tires having the same dimensions as those provided with the vehicle can be used.

The maximum speed reachable with winter tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the
regulations in force in the Country you are driving in.

Tire pressure 233


Cap7_usa.fm Page 234 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:12 PM

Run Flat (optional)

Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S Inflation pressure


Wheel rim size Tire size Wheel rim size Tire size When cold (Bar)
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / / 2.2
front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 2.2
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / / 2.2
rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 2.2

This is a high performance car. Tire wear will vary based on a number of factors including the type of driving.
Check tires regularly for wear and replace as necessary.

234 Tire pressure


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 235 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Tire pressure 235


Cap8_FOTO.fm Page 236 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:20 PM

236
Cap8_FOTO.fm Page 237 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:20 PM

Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance Services 238


Additional operations 244
Level checks 245
Air filter 249
Dust/pollen filter 249
Battery 249
Electronic control units 251
Spark plugs 251
Wheels and tires 252
Windshield wipers 254
Air conditioning system 255
Bodywork 255
Interior 257
If the vehicle is not used for long periods 258

237
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 238 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Scheduled Maintenance After the 12th maintenance WARNING: You are advised to notify
service your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
Services of any minor operating problems,
After the 12th service, maintenance
must be restarted with the operations without waiting for the next service.
Correct maintenance is clearly the best scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd
way to ensure vehicle performance service.
and safety features, ensure respect for
the environment and low operating WARNING: The Scheduled
costs. Maintenance services are prescribed by
the Manufacturer. Failure to have the
WARNING: Also remember that services carried out may invalidate the
properly following the maintenance warranty.
procedures is essential for the validity
of the warranty.

For this reason, MASERATI has


provided for a series of checks and
maintenance operations involving the
1st service when the vehicle mileage
reaches 12,500 mi. (20,000 km) or after
2 years of the vehicle's life, and every
12,500 mi. (20,000 km) or 2 years
thereafter, whichever occurs first.

238 Scheduled Maintenance Services


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 239 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

When the deadlines for Scheduled Select "INFO SERVICE" on the Bose® WARNING: Every time the battery is
Maintenance are approaching, a Infotainment system to view the next disconnected, the Bose® Infotainment
message on the display indicates that deadline for maintenance service (see system must be set following the
maintenance service is due. The the section 4 "Navigation" of the instructions in the "Bose®
deadline may be expressed in mi/km or Bose® Infotainment). The number of Infotainment" manual, section 4,
days, whichever comes first. miles/kilometers left before reaching "Navigation". Failure to reset the
The message is displayed only once, the maintenance service deadline is system may cause it to malfunction and
upon activating the instrument panel, always indicated. The days remaining indicate wrong maintenance service
at decreasing intervals expressed in before the scheduled date instead, are intervals.
mi/km (1800, 1600, ...... 100, 50 ) or in only indicated starting from the 511th
days (27, 24, ....... 6, 3), accompanied by day (approximately 17 months).
a specific symbol (wrench):
When the number of kilometers/miles
or the expiry day for servicing has been
reached, every time the instrument
panel activates, the message "Service
Coupon Expired" will be displayed.

Scheduled Maintenance Services 239


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 240 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Main operations to be carried out at the indicated kilometers/mileage


Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
Mileage (x thousands) 12.5
Kilometers (x thousands) 20 or
2 years
whichever occurs first

Belt for alternator, air conditioning compressor I I* I I* I I* I I* I I* I I*


and hydraulic steering control Replace at least every 2 years

Poly-V flexible control belt for water pump I I I I R I I I I R I I


Replace every time the part is removed

Engine oil and filter R R R R R R R R R R R R


Replace at least every 2 years

Cooling system connections and lines I I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I*


Air filter R R* R R* R R* R R* R R* R R*
Fuel injection system’s connections and lines I I* I I* I I*
Ignition system: cables and connections I I* I I* I I*
Spark plugs R R
Active carbon filter and oxygen sensors R

8 Replace at least every 4 years

OBDII system’s filter replacement R R R R R


Replace at least every 4 years

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

240 Scheduled Maintenance Services


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 241 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
Mileage (x thousands) 12.5
Kilometers (x thousands) 20 or
2 years
whichever occurs first

Air injection system: connections and pipes I I I I I I I I I I I I


valves
Blow-by system I I I I I
Fuel vapor filter R R
Fuel emission control system: lines, I I I I I I
connections and valves
Gearbox oil I I I I I I I I I I I I
Differential oil I I I I I I I I I I I I
Hydraulic steering fluid level (bleed if I I I I I I I I I I I I
necessary) Replace every 2 years

Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I


Replace every 2 years

Brake fluid level (bleed if necessary) I I I I I I I I I I I I


Replace every 2 years

Braking system: lines, calipers, connections I I I I I I I I I I I I


8
Efficiency of the dashboard warning lights
Handbrake operation

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

Scheduled Maintenance Services 241


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 242 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
Mileage (x thousands) 12.5
Kilometers (x thousands) 20 or
2 years
whichever occurs first

Wear condition of the braking parts (disks, I I I I I I I I I I I I


pads); replace if necessary
Joints for front and rear suspensions, front I I I I I I I I I I I I
and rear under-chassis – tightening torques
Steering system components, joint protection, I I I I I I I I I I I I
rack boots on the steering levers and on the
axle shafts
Tightening of screws, nuts and bolts (including I I I I I I I I I I I I
those for the exhaust system), connections,
retaining clips and clamps
Pollen filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
Replace every 2 years. In the event that the vehicle is
frequently used in dusty or strongly polluted environments,
a more frequent replacement is recommended

Starter motor and alternator: power I I I I I


absorption and charge
8 Vehicle geometry check I I I I I I I I I I I I
Controls and adjustment systems in general, I I I I I I I I I I I I
hinges, doors, front and rear lid

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

242 Scheduled Maintenance Services


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 243 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
Mileage (x thousands) 12.5
Kilometers (x thousands) 20 or
2 years
whichever occurs first

Correct operation and reliability of the seats I I I I I I I I I I I I


and seat belts

Setting the weight sensors I I I I I I I I I I I I


(USA version only) Check every 2 years

Fastening screws and nuts on the bodywork I I I I I I I I


Headlight aiming I I I I I I I I I I I I
Proper condition of chassis and protected I I I I I I I I I I I I
areas Check every 2 years

Leather interiors treatment I I I I I I I I I I I I


Vehicle road test (any time this may be I I I I I I I I I I I I
necessary)
Check with SD3 diagnostic system I I I I I I I I I I I I

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

All the operations marked with and The warranty concerning emissions and 8
asterisk (*) are not mandatory but the Manufacturer's responsibility to
rather recommended, in the event that recall the vehicle in case of problems
the vehicle is frequently used in heavy- shall not be invalidated if the Customer
traffic conditions or on dusty or sandy does not carry out the operations
roads. marked with the asterisk (*).

Scheduled Maintenance Services 243


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 244 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Additional operations WARNING - Engine oil WARNING - Air filter


If the vehicle is used mainly in one of When using the vehicle on dusty roads,
Every 300 mi. (500 km) or before long the following particularly severe replace the air filter more frequently
journeys, check and if necessary conditions: than indicated on the Maintenance
restore: – dusty roads Schedule.
– engine coolant level Contact your local Authorized
– short repetitive trips (less than 5-6
Maserati Dealer if you have any doubts
– windshield washer fluid level mi) when the external temperature
about the frequency for the engine oil
– tire pressure and condition is below zero
and air filter replacements, in relation
– engine oil. – engine running frequently at idle to the vehicle's conditions of use.
speed or without reaching steady
operating temperatures WARNING: All maintenance
replace the engine oil more frequently operations for the vehicle must be
than indicated on the Maintenance carried out by your local Authorized
Schedule. Maserati Dealer. For those routine and
minor maintenance operations which
you can carry out yourself, make sure
that you always use suitable
equipment, original Maserati spare
parts and the prescribed fluids; in any
case, never carry out these operations
if you are not experienced.

244 Additional operations


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 245 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Level checks
1) Engine oil
2) Engine coolant
3) Windshield washer fluid
4) Fluid brakes
5) Power steering fluid

2
3

Level checks 245


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 246 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Engine oil If the oil level is close to or below the WARNING: The engine oil used and the
MIN level notch, top up to the MAX oil filter replaced contain substances
The level must be checked with the
notch through the filler neck that are dangerous for the
vehicle on a flat surface, following the
positioned next to the dipstick and environment. For replacing the oil and
procedure below:
closed with the cap A. The oil level the filters you are advised to contact
– Warm-up the vehicle until reaching should never exceed the MAX your local Authorized Maserati Dealer,
the standard operating temperature reference mark. where all the necessary equipment is
– Stop the engine, remove the filler available to dispose of the used oil and
cap A and wait 5 minutes to allow WARNING: Do not top up with oil filters in compliance with the
the oil to flow into the sump having characteristics other than those regulations in force and in an
– Measure the level and top up if of the oil already used in the engine. environment-friendly manner.
necessary.
After topping up, the engine oil level Used engine oil contains
The oil level must be between the MIN
warning light may not go off for some chemicals that have caused
and MAX reference on the dipstick.
time while the system is performing cancer in laboratory animals.
The gap between MIN and MAX
the necessary tests. This is to be Always protect your skin by washing
corresponds to about 0.4 US gallon
considered normal. thoroughly with soap and water.
(1.5 litres) of oil.

WARNING: Do not exceed the MAX After having topped up or replaced


level! the oil, check its level once again.

A
8
MAX

MIN

246 Level checks


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 247 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Gearbox oil Engine coolant Windshield/headlight washer


Contact your local Authorized fluid
When the engine is very hot,
Maserati Dealer for the oil level check. To top up with fluid, open the cover,
do not remove the cap from
pull out the filler neck extension and
the tank: risk of burns!
WARNING: Do not top up with oil pour in a mixture of water and
having characteristics other than those windshield washer fluid, in the
The fluid level must be checked when
of the oil already used in the gearbox. proportions indicated on the product's
the engine is cold, and it must fall
packaging.
between the MIN and MAX references
WARNING: Used gearbox oil contains
marked on the tank.
substances that are dangerous for the WARNING: If the temperature is below
If the level is low, slowly pour the
environment. For replacing the oil, you -4°F (–20°C), use pure windshield
prescribed fluid through the filler neck
are advised to contact your local washer fluid.
Authorized Maserati Dealer, where the on the tank until the level is close to
necessary equipment is available to the MAX reference point. WARNING: Do not drive with the
dispose of the used oil in compliance windshield washer reservoir empty:
with the regulations in force and in an the action of the washer is essential for
environment-friendly manner. improving visibility.

8
MAX

MIN

Level checks 247


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 248 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Power steering fluid Brake fluid WARNING: Do not let the brake fluid,
which is highly corrosive, come into
Check that the fluid level in the tank is
WARNING: Make sure that the power contact with the paintwork. If this
at the maximum level. If the level
steering fluid does not come in contact should happen, wash the paintwork
drops below the minimum level, with
with the engine hot parts as it is immediately with water.
the ignition key turned to MAR (ON),
flammable.
the warning light BRAKE illuminates
WARNING: The symbol on the
on the instrument panel.
With the vehicle on a level ground and container identifies the synthetic type
the engine cold, check that the fluid of brake fluid, distinguishing it from
If fluid is needed, use only the type
level corresponds with the MAX notch the mineral type. Using mineral fluids
classified as DOT4.
on the tank cap dipstick. damages the special rubber linings of
To carry out the check, unscrew the the brake system beyond repair.
WARNING: The brake fluid is
cap, clean the dipstick, tighten the cap
hygroscopic (i.e., it absorbs moisture).
back on tight, remove it again and
For this reason, if the vehicle is used
check the level.
mainly in areas with a high rate of
When the oil is hot, the level may even
atmospheric humidity, the fluid should
exceed the MAX notch.
be changed more frequently than
If necessary, top up with fluid making
indicated in the Maintenance
sure that it has the same characteristics
Schedule.
as the one already used in the system.

MAX
8

MAX
MAX

MAX
MIN

248 Level checks


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 249 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Air filter Dust/pollen filter Battery


Contact your local Authorized This filter performs mechanical/ The battery fitted is of the “low
Maserati Dealer to have the air filter electrostatic air filtering, provided that maintenance” type, and is located on
replaced. windows and doors are completely the right-hand side of the luggage
closed. compartment.
Have your dust/pollen filter replaced at To access the battery, remove the cover
least once a year at your local A by lifting the fastening hooks B.
Authorized Maserati Dealer, The battery fluid (electrolyte), with the
preferably at the beginning of the vehicle level, must always fall between
summer period. the reference marks MIN and MAX on
If the car is mainly used in the city the battery.
traffic, on highways or dusty roads, we In the event that the level is below the
recommend to replace the filter more MIN reference mark, please contact
frequently than prescribed in the your local Authorized Maserati Dealer
Maintenance Schedule. to have the system checked.
To recharge the battery, see the section
WARNING: Failure to replace the filter “In an emergency”.
may considerably reduce the air
conditioning and heating system
efficiency.

We recommend that you


replace the dust/pollen filter
at your local Authorized B A
Maserati Dealer.
8

Air filter / Dust/pollen filterAir


/ Battery
filter 249
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 250 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

The fluid contained in the WARNING: Incorrect assembly of WARNING: If the battery charge
battery is poisonous and electrical and electronic accessories can remains below 50% for a long period
corrosive. Avoid contact with cause serious damage to the vehicle. of time, it will be damaged due to
the skin and eyes. Do not approach the sulphating; its performance and
battery with open flames or possible WARNING: Ventilation hose: The starting power will be reduced and it
sources of sparks: risk of explosion battery generates hydrogen gas, which will be more subject to freezing (this
and fire. is flammable and explosive. The can happen even at 14°F / -10°C).
battery is fitted with a ventilation hose
Batteries contain substances that are which vents hydrogen gas out of the We recommend you to have the
very harmful to the environment. To battery compartment throught a battery charge condition checked,
replace the battery, please contact ventilation opening in the bottom of preferably at the beginning of the cold
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer, this compartment. If the battery must season, to prevent the electrolyte from
where the battery will be disposed of be replaced, it is essential that the freezing.
in full compliance with the regulations ventilation hose is properly connected This check should be carried out more
in force and in an environment- to the battery and that it is routed frequently if the vehicle is used mainly
friendly manner. through the ventilation opening for short trips or if it is equipped with
provided. power absorbing devices that remain
Battery posts, terminals and Be sure the ventilation hose is free of permanently on even if when the
related accessories contain the debris. Only use replacement ignition key is removed. This applies
lead and lead compounds. batteries equipped with a ventilation above all if these devices have been
Wash your hands after handling. hose. Consult your local Authorized retrofitted ("After market" services).
Maserati Dealer. If the vehicle is not used for long
periods of time, please refer to the
Useful advice for extending the section “If the vehicle is not used for
life of the battery long periods”, in this section.
When parking the vehicle, make sure
8 that the doors, front, rear lids and flaps WARNING: If additional systems have
are properly closed. All interior lights to be fitted in the vehicle, there is the
should be off. risk of creating dangerous connections
When the engine is turned off, do not on the electric wiring, in particular if
keep the connected devices switched the safety devices are involved.
on for a long time (for example the
radio, the hazard warning lights, the
fan, etc.).
250 Battery
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 251 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Electronic control units – Do not connect or disconnect the Spark plugs


terminals of the electronic control
units when the ignition key is in the
No special precautions are required for It is essential that the spark plugs are
MAR (ON) position.
the normal use of the vehicle. sound and clean for the engine to
In case of repairs to the electrical – Do not check the electric polarities work efficiently and to ensure that
system or in an emergency starting, the through sparking. polluting emissions are kept to a
following instructions must be strictly – Disconnect the electronic control minimum level.
followed: units when carrying out electric
– Never disconnect the battery from weldings on the body. Remove them WARNING: The spark plugs must be
the electrical system when the if the temperature is over 176 °F changed at the intervals specified in
engine is running. (80°C) (special interventions on the the Maintenance Schedule. Only use
bodywork, etc.). the prescribed spark plugs: faults may
– Disconnect the battery from the
arise if the heat rating is unsuitable, or
electrical system when recharging it. WARNING: Incorrect installation or if the specified working life is not
modifications to the radio and alarm ensured.
WARNING: When the battery is
systems may interfere with the proper
disconnected, you must first detach
operation of the electronic control
the negative terminal (–) and then the
units.
positive one (+).
When the battery is reconnected, you
WARNING: Changes or repairs to the
must first attach the positive (+) and
electrical system carried out in an
then the negative one (–).
incorrect manner or without taking
into account the technical
– Never carry out an emergency start specifications of the system may cause
with a battery charger: always use an operating anomalies with the risk of
auxiliary battery. fire.
– Take special care when connecting 8
the battery to the electrical system, WARNING: If you need to wash the
checking both for correct polarity engine compartment, do not direct the
and for proper connection. jet of water for too long directly on the
engine compartment ECU.

Electronic control unitscontrol


Electronic / Sparkunits
plugs 251
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 252 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Wheels and tires How to use the tires Impacts with curbs, holes, and
obstacles in the road, and prolonged
WARNING: The tires must be
trips on rough roads can cause tire
To help obtain optimum constantly kept in good conditions to
damage which may not be visible to
performance and the longest help ensure safe driving. Always check
the naked eye.
mileage from the tires, comply your tires regularly for tread wear.
Check your tires regularly for any signs
with the following precautions during
of damage (e.g., scratches, cuts, cracks,
the first 300 miles (500 Km): The tires inflation pressure must
bulges, etc.).
- do not drive at maximum allowed correspond to the prescribed values
If sharp objects penetrate the tires,
speed and should be checked only when the
they can cause structural damage
- drive on curves at low speed tires have cooled down. In fact, the
which is only visible when the tire is
- avoid sudden steering pressure increases as the tire
removed.
- avoid sudden braking temperature progressively increases.
In any case, any possible damage must
- avoid sudden accelerations Never reduce the pressure if tires are
be inspected by an experienced tire
hot.
- do not drive at high speeds for too personnel, as it may seriously reduce
long. Insufficient tire inflating pressure can
the tire life.
cause tire overheating and possible
Remember that tires deteriorate with
internal damages, which may even
time, even if used little or not at all.
lead to the tire destruction.
Cracks in the tire tread and sidewalls,
alongside possible bulging, are a sign
Check the inflating pressure of
the tires when cold, at least of deterioration.
every two weeks and before
long trips.

252 Wheels and tires


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 253 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Have the old tires inspected During the tire life, the rolling
by an experienced tire person, direction used for the first
to make sure they can still be fitting shall always be
used safely. If the same tire has been observed, also in case of “non-
on your vehicle for 4 or 5 years, have it directional” tires.
inspected anyway by an experienced
tire person. Always follow the tire Check the depth of the tire
manufacturer’s recommendations. tread at regular intervals
(minimum allowed value
Never fit tires of uncertain 0.063 in / 1.6 mm). The thinner is the
origin. tread, the greater is the risk of
skidding.
“Directional” tires have an
Drive carefully on wet roads
arrow on their sidewall
to decrease the risk of
showing the rolling direction.
aquaplaning.
To keep the best performance when
replacing a tire, make sure that the
rolling direction corresponds to the
one shown by the arrow.

Wheels and tires 253


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 254 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Windshield wipers We recommend therefore that Spray nozzles


you have any interventions
If the spray nozzle does not work, first
involving the removal of the
Clean the rubber parts regularly using check that there is fluid in the tank (see
windshield wiper arms carried out at
the specific products. “Level checks” in this section) then
your local Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Replace the blades if the edge of the check that the nozzles are not clogged.
rubber is deformed or worn. In any Some simple measures may reduce the
case, the blades should be replaced Replacing the windshield wiper
possibility of damage to the blades.
approximately once a year. blades
– In the case of temperatures below
Due to the difficulty of this operation,
Travelling with worn wiper freezing, check that ice has not stuck
we recommend that you contact your
blades is very dangerous the rubber part against the
local Authorized Maserati Dealer for
because it reduces the windshield. If necessary, use an anti-
replacement.
visibility in the event of poor freeze product to detach it.
atmospheric conditions. – Remove any snow that has
accumulated on the windshield: as
The windshield wiper arms well as protecting the blades, this
have to be replaced with new avoids forcing and overheating the
ones after two disassembling wiper’s electric motor.
operations. The special arm fixing – Do not operate the wipers when the
system helps ensure the proper windshield is dry.
mechanical stability only for the first
two refitting operations, provided
that the specified tightening torque is
observed.

254 Windshield wipers


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 255 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Air conditioning system Bodywork – Spraying of the underbody, engine


compartment, insides of wheel
housings, and other structures with
During the winter, the air conditioning Protection from atmospheric wax products having high protective
system should be operated at least agents power.
once a month for about 10 minutes. The main causes of corrosion are:
Before the summer season, have the – Spraying of plastic materials, with a
– atmospheric pollution protective function, in the most
system checked by your local
Authorized Maserati Dealer. – salt and humidity in the atmosphere exposed points: underneath the
(marine areas or a damp climate) doors, inside part of the fenders,
WARNING: The system uses R134a type – seasonal environmental conditions. edges, etc.
coolant that, in the event of accidental – salt used to remove snow/ice from – Use of ventilated box sections,
leakage, is not harmful for the roads. coated with protective wax
environment. Under no circumstances products, to avoid condensation and
The abrasive action of wind-carried
should you use R12 coolant that, in trapped water which could
atmospheric dust and sand, mud and
addition to being incompatible with encourage the formation of internal
the system components, contains stones should not be underestimated.
rust.
chloroflurocarbons (CFCs). On your vehicle, MASERATI has
adopted technological solutions to Advice for keeping the
help protect the bodywork from bodywork in good condition
corrosion.
Paint
The main measures are:
The paintwork does not only have an
– Paint products and systems that give aesthetic function but also serves to
the vehicle particular resistance to help protect the sheet metal. In the
corrosion and abrasion. event of abrasions or deep scratches,
– Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) we recommend to have the necessary
sheet metal which is highly resistant
to corrosion in the most exposed
touch-ups made immediately, to avoid 8
any rust formation.
parts. Touch-ups do not feature particular
difficulties, even on metallic finishes.
For all paint touch-ups, use only
original products indicated on the
label applied on the engine
compartment lid.
Air conditioning system / Bodywork
Air conditioning system 255
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 256 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Normal paint maintenance consists in When drying, take particular care with Windows
washing, the frequency of which the parts that are less visible, such as To clean the windows use appropriate
depends on the conditions of use and the door and lid bays, headlight edges, glass cleaners.
of the environment. For example, in in which water can be trapped more Only use clean cloths so as not to
areas where there is high atmospheric easily. scratch the windows or rendering
pollution or the roads are spread with Do not to take the vehicle immediately them less transparent.
anti-freeze salt, it is advisable to wash into an enclosed environment, but
the vehicle more frequently. leave it in the open air so as to allow Engine compartment
the water to evaporate.
At the end of each winter season,
WARNING: Detergents pollute water. Do not wash the vehicle after it has
carefully wash the engine
Therefore the vehicle should be been left in the sun or when the
compartment, remembering to avoid
washed in areas equipped for the engine lid is hot: the paint gloss could
directing the jet of water for too long
collection and purification of the fluids be affected.
on the ECUs on the left-hand side, next
used for washing. External plastic parts must be cleaned
to the brake fluid tank, and on the
with the same procedure followed for
relay and fuse boxes on the right-hand
WARNING: If you are washing the the normal washing of the vehicle.
side of the engine compartment
vehicle with roller brushes, you must Avoid, as far as possible, parking the
(driving direction). To perform this
protect the edges of the rear, lateral vehicle under trees; the resinous
operation, you must contact a
brand symbols with tape, to prevent it substances that very often drop from
from being detached by the revolving specialised workshop.
the trees give the paint a dull
brushes. appearance and increase the
WARNING: Wash only when the
possibility of originating corrosive
For correct washing: engine is cold and with the ignition
processes. key turned to STOP. After washing,
– Wet the bodywork with a low- make sure that the various protections
pressure water jet. WARNING: Bird droppings must be (e.g. rubber boots/caps, guards etc.)
– Pass a sponge with a light detergent washed off immediately and have not been removed or damaged.
8 solution over the bodywork, thoroughly, since their acidity is
frequently rinsing the sponge. particularly corrosive.
– Rinse well with water and dry with
WARNING: To provide better
an air jet or chamois leather. protection for the paint, polish the
vehicle at intervals with a suitable
product leaving a protective film on
the paint.
256 Bodywork
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 257 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Interior WARNING: Never use alcohol, alcohol- Parts in premium quality wood
based products or solvents.
Remove any dirt with a buckskin
Check at regular intervals that there is leather or damp cloth.
Leather upholstery treatment
no water trapped under the mats (due
to wet shoes, umbrellas etc.) which Have the leather upholstery only WARNING: Do not use alcohol, petrol
may cause the metal parts to oxidize. treated, as provided in the or solvents to clean the instrument
Maintenance Schedule, by your local panel's transparent cover.
Cleaning the leather upholstery Authorized Maserati Dealer which has
the required specific products. Do not keep aerosol cans in
– Remove the dry dirt with a damp
the vehicle. Risk of explosion.
buckskin leather or cloth, without
Aerosol cans should never be
rubbing too hard.
exposed to a temperature above 122°F
– Remove liquid or grease stains with a (50°C). The temperature inside the
dry absorbent cloth, without vehicle when exposed to the sun may
rubbing. easily exceed this threshold.
– Then wipe with a soft cloth or
buckskin damped with water and
neutral detergent.
– If the stain persists, use special
products paying attention to the
instructions for use.

Interior 257
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 258 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If the vehicle is not used – Cover the vehicle with a cover in Restarting the vehicle
transpirating fabric (available from Before restarting the vehicle after a
for long periods your local Authorized Maserati long period of inactivity, we
Dealer). Do not use thick plastic recommend that you carry out the
If the vehicle is not going to be used sheets, which do not allow the following operations:
for several months, follow the below humidity on the vehicle surface to
precautions: evaporate. Check the tires for pressure
– Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly. – Inflate the tires up to a pressure and for any damages, cuts or
– Store the vehicle in a covered, dry which must be 14.50 psi (1 bar) cracks. If this is the case, have
and, if possible, ventilated area. higher than the normally prescribed them replaced.
one, and check it at regular intervals.
– Select P (PARK), then turn the key to
position STOP. – Do not dry-rub the external surface
The tire pressure must be of the vehicle.
– Disconnect the battery. brought back to the – Visually inspect if there are any fluid
– Check the battery charge condition. prescribed value before leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid,
This check should be carried out reusing the vehicle. engine coolant, etc.).
monthly while the vehicle is stored.
Recharge the battery if the load-free – Do not empty the engine cooling – Have the engine oil and filter
voltage is below 12.5 V. system. replaced.
– Check that the handbrake is not – Check the fluid levels in the brake
engaged. system, as well as the engine coolant
level.
– Clean and protect the painted parts
applying protective wax. – Check the air filter and have it
replaced if necessary.
– Clean and protect polished metal
parts with special products available
8 on the market.
– Talc the windshield wiper blades and
raise them from the windshield.

258 If the vehicle is not used for long periods


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 259 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

– Check the conditions of the engine Reconnecting the battery WARNING: Every time the battery is
belts. reconnected the warning lights PARK
– Open the luggage compartment lid
– Reconnect the battery after having and flash for about 10 seconds
with the key;
checked its charge condition and and then go off.
– connect the battery;
carry out the initialization
procedures where required. You can – unlock and lock the doors using the
consult the chapter “Reconnecting remote control;
the battery” in this section for – turn on the Bose® Infotainment and
further information on this subject. set the date and time following the
– With the gearshift in neutral (N), let instructions given in the section 7
the engine idle for several minutes. "Options" in the "Bose®
Infotainment" manual.
This procedure must be WARNING: Every time the battery is
performed outdoors. Exhaust reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds
gases contain carbon with the ignition key turned to MAR
monoxide which is strongly toxic and (ON) before starting the engine, in
potentially lethal. order to allow the electronic system
that manages the motor-driven
throttles to run a self-learning cycle. At
the same time, you can perform the
set-up procedure for the "Bose®
Infotainment" system.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods 259


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 260 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Conversion table
Distance
1 km = 0.6214 mi 1 mi = 1.609 km
1m = 3.2808 ft 1 ft = 0.3048 m
1m = 1.0936 yd 1 yd = 0.9144 m
1 cm = 0.3937 in 1 in = 2.54 cm
Volume
1l = 0.2642 US gallon 1 US gallon = 3.785 l
Weight
1 kg = 2.2046 lb 1 lb = 0.4536 kg
Power
1 kW = 1.341 hp 1 hp = 0.746 kW
Pressure
1 bar = 14.5 psi 1 psi = 0.0689 bar
Consumptions
1 km/l = 0.4251 mpg 1 mpg = 2.3524 km/l

260 If the vehicle is not used for long periods


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 261 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

If the vehicle is not used for long periods 261


Cap9_FOTO.fm Page 262 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:23 PM

262
Cap9_FOTO.fm Page 263 Friday, June 6, 2008 6:23 PM

Table of contents

Table of contents 264


Alphabetical table of contents 269

263
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 264 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Table of contents Adjusting the front seat belts height Low pressure 49
(front seats only) 25 Tire punctures 50
Using the rear seat belts 25 “Run Flat” tire puncture 50
Historical info 4 Load limiting devices 26 System not calibrated 52
Introduction 7 Pretensioners 26 Tire pressure monitoring system
Consulting the Manual 7 General warnings for using the seat failure 52
Abbreviations 7 belts 27 System temporarily not active 53
Updating 7 How to keep seat belts efficient 28 System not active 53
Service 8 Proper transport of children 29 Parking sensors 54
Automatic gearbox 8 Latch system 33 Stop & Go function 55
NHTSA’s Toll-free Fitting the Latch system child seat in Cleaning the sensors 55
Auto Safety Hotline 8 rearward-facing position 34 Sensor range 56
Bose® Infotainment 8 Fitting the child seat in frontward- Failure indicators 57
“Run Flat” tires (optional) 9 facing position 34 Fuel cut-out inertia switch 58
Towing the vehicle 9 Transport of persons with Resetting the switch 58
Symbols 10 disability 35
Danger symbols 10 Front and side airbags 36 Instruments and controls 61
Symbols of prohibitions 10 Front airbags 37 Dashboard 62
Warning symbols 11 Front and rear side airbags 40 Instrument panel 68
Symbols indicating compulsory General warnings 41 Indicators and warning lights 69
measures 11 MSP System 43 Instruments and gauges 75
Contents 13 Activation 43 Fuel level gauge 75
Fault indicators 43 Speedometer 75
Vehicle identification data 15 ASR system (electronic anti-skid Tachometer 75
Identification plates 16 device) 44 Coolant temperature gauge 76
Chassis marking 16 Activation 44 Display 76
Engine marking 16 Fault indicators 44 Controls 77
Homologation labels 17 MSR function (engine braking TRIP screen page 78
Instruction labels 19 torque adjustment) 44 Tire pressure screen page 78
ABS and EBD systems 45 RPM indicator screen page 80
9 Key codes 21
Tire pressure monitoring system 47 Bose® Infotainment 80
Active and passive safety 23 System calibration 48 Controls 81
Seat belts 24 Viewing messages on the display 48 Controls on the left of the steering
Fastening the seat belts 24 Normal conditions 49 wheel 81

264 Table of contents


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 265 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Controls on the right of the steering 10 mph (16 km/h) 103 Alarm memory 116
wheel 83 Door release in the event of an Ordering extra radio operated
Side buttons on the Bose® accident 103 controls 116
Infotainment 84 Door lock ECU initialization 103 Replacing radio operated control
Roof controls 86 Door open indicator 103 batteries 117
Internal Equipment 87 Underdoor courtesy light 103 Front seats 118
Sunroof 87 Power windows 104 Back/forward adjustment 118
Front dome light 88 Finger-trap prevention device 104 Height adjustment 118
Rear dome light 88 Operation in manual and Seat inclination adjustment
HomeLink 89 automatic modes 104 (tilting) 118
Sun visors 92 Controls 105 Seatback rake adjustment 118
Clock 92 Central opening/closing of the Adjusting the headrest 118
Rear window sunshade 92 windows 105 Lumbar support adjustment 118
Rear door sunshades (optional) 93 Engine compartment lid 106 Comfort Pack (optional) 119
Front ashtray and cigarette Luggage compartment 107 Winter Pack 119
lighter 93 Emergency opening Storing the seats and external
Rear ashtray 94 of the luggage compartment 108 rear-view mirrors positions 120
Beverage holder on center Fuel tank door 109 Headrest 120
console 94 Armrest 121
Fuel tank door emergency
Glove compartment 94 Easy entry/exit system 121
opening 109
Temperature controlled beverage Rear seats 122
Keys 110
holder 95 Rear seat adjustments 122
The Maserati CODE system 110
Map pockets 95 Armrest 122
Operation 110
Handholds 95 Comfort Pack (optional) 123
Duplicating the keys 111
Tables (optional) 96 Comfort Pack Controls 124
Emergency starting 111
Winter Pack (optional) 124
Before you drive 99 Ignition switch 113
Headrests 124
Doors 100 Electronic alarm system 114
Rear-view mirrors 125
Opening doors from the outside 100 Activation 114
External rear-view mirrors 125
Opening from the inside 101 Deactivation 115
Electrochromic internal rear-view
Doors open warning lights 101 Getting into the vehicle when the
mirror 126 9
Child safety device 102 alarm system is on 115
Steering wheel 127
Easy entry/exit system cut-out Deactivating the motion sensing
device 102 alarm 116 Easy entry/exit system 127
Automatic door locking over Deactivating the anti-lift alarm 116 External lights and direction

Table of contents 265


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 266 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

indicators 128 Starting-off when the engine Skyhook suspension 170


Light switch 128 is cold 150 Self-diagnosis 170
Parking lights 128 Emergency starting Settings 171
Automatic on and off 129 with an auxiliary battery 151 Fault signals 172
Twilight sensor 129 Turning off the engine 151 Headlights 173
Direction indicators 130 Electronic automatic gearbox 152 Xenon headlights 173
High beams 130 Automatic operation (AUTO) 154 Driving conditions 174
Flashing the headlights 130 + / - – Sequential manual operation Before your trip 174
“Follow me home” function 131 (MANUAL) 157 Capacities 174
Windshield wiper/washer and Other system functions 157 Safe driving 174
headlight washers 132 Malfunction indication 160 Before you drive 174
Windshield wipers 132 Push start 161 Travelling 175
Windshield washer 132 Towing the vehicle 161 Driving at night 175
Headlight washers 132 Gearshift levers on the steering Driving in the rain 175
Rain sensor 133 wheel (optional) 162 Driving in fog 176
Sensor failure 133 Fuel economy 163 Driving in the mountains 176
Bose® Infotainment 134 Using the brakes 164 Driving on snow or ice 176
Controls 135 Use of the engine 165 Emission control devices 177
Main panel controls 136 Breaking-in 165 Other advices 178
Controls repeated on the steering Engine and transmission 165 Parking 179
wheel 137 While driving 165 Electric parking brake 179
Air conditioning and heating Engine control system (OBDII) 166 Tires 182
system 138 Cruise Control 167 Glossary of tire terminology 182
Front automatic heating/air General 167 Tire identification number: 182
conditioning controls (A) 140 Controls 167 DOT Quality Grades 183
Rear automatic heating/air Storing a speed 168 Treadwear 183
conditioning controls (B) Recalling the speed stored in the Traction 183
(optional) 141 memory 168 Temperature 183
General 142 Increasing the speed stored in the Other tire markings 184
Rear control panel 144 memory 168 Tire placard/label 184
9 System initialization 144 Reducing the speed stored in the Importance of proper inflation
Bose® Surround Sound 145 memory 169 pressure 184
Resetting the speed stored in the Tire care 185
Using the vehicle 149 memory 169 Vehicle load limits: 185
Starting the engine 150
266 Table of contents
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 267 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Winter tires 186 Engine compartment fuses 207 Fuel consumption (m.p.g. (USA)) 223
Snow chains 186 Fuses and relays in the passenger Capacities: quantity and specifications
Useful accessories to keep compartment, to the left of the of the products to use 224
on-board 187 steering wheel 210 Capacities and recommended
Relays in the passenger products 224
In an emergency 189 compartment, on the left of the Technical specifications 226
Emergency starting 190 steering wheel 211 Engine 226
Toolkit 191 Fuses inside the passenger Injection – Ignition 226
If a tire gets a puncture 192 compartment, to the left of the Battery 226
Precautions in the event of a steering wheel 211 Alternator 227
puncture 192 Relay/fuse boxes inside Lubrication system 227
Spare wheel (emergency wheel - the luggage compartment 213 Cooling system 227
optional) 194 Relays inside the luggage Transmission 227
Refitting the standard wheel 198 compartment 214 Brakes 228
If an exterior light goes out 199 Fuses inside the luggage Suspension 228
compartment 214 Speed-sensitive steering 228
Headlight clusters 199
Taillight clusters 199 If the battery is flat 216 Wheels 229
Direction indicator side lights 200 Starting with an auxiliary battery 216 Performance 231
Third stop light 201 Charging the battery 216 Weights 231
License plate lights 201 If you have to jack up the vehicle 217 Dimensions 232
If an interior light goes out 202 Using the jack 217 Tire pressure 233
Front and rear dome light 202 If you have to tow the vehicle 218
Courtesy mirror light 202 In the event of an accident 219 Maintenance 237
Glove compartment, glove box If there are injured persons 219 Scheduled Maintenance Services 238
and luggage compartment light 203 After the 12th maintenance
Courtesy lights (below door) 204 Capacities and technical service 238
If a fuse blows 205 specifications 221 Main operations to be carried out at
Fuel Requirements 222 the indicated kilometers/mileage 240
Replacing the fuses 205
Position of fuses/relays 205 Octane Rating 222 Additional operations 244
Fuse colors 205 Unleaded Fuel 222 WARNING - Engine oil 244
Maxi fuse colors 205 Gasoline Containing Alcohol WARNING - Air filter 244 9
Fuses and relays in the engine & Ethers ("Oxygenated Fuels") 222 Level checks 245
compartment 206 Engine oil 223 Engine oil 246
Engine compartment relay 207 Fuel consumption 223 Gearbox oil 247
Engine coolant 247
Table of contents 267
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 268 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Windshield/headlight washer Table of contents 263


fluid 247 Table of contents 264
Power steering fluid 248 Alphabetical table of contents 269
Brake fluid 248
Air filter 249 Details to be recorded 275
Dust/pollen filter 249
Battery 249
Useful advice for extending
the life of the battery 250
Electronic control units 251
Spark plugs 251
Wheels and tires 252
How to use the tires 252
Windshield wipers 254
Spray nozzles 254
Replacing the windshield wiper
blades 254
Air conditioning system 255
Bodywork 255
Protection from atmospheric
agents 255
Advice for keeping the bodywork
in good condition 255
Engine compartment 256
Interior 257
Cleaning the leather upholstery 257
Leather upholstery treatment 257
Parts in premium quality wood 257
If the vehicle is not used for long
9 periods 258
Restarting the vehicle 258
Reconnecting the battery 259
Conversion table 260

268 Table of contents


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 269 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Alphabetical table of Auto gearbox setting 74 Central opening/closing


Automatic door locking over of the windows 105
contents 10 mph (16 km/h) 103 Charging the battery 216
Automatic Gearbox condition (*) 69 Chassis marking 16
Automatic gearbox 8 Child safety device 102
A Automatic on and off 129 Cleaning the leather upholstery 257
Abbreviations 7 Automatic operation (AUTO) 154 Cleaning the sensors 55
ABS and EBD systems 45 Clock 92
Activation 114 B Comfort Pack (optional) 119
Activation 43 Comfort Pack (optional) 123
Activation 44 Back/forward adjustment 118 Comfort Pack Controls 124
Adaptive Light Control system Battery 226 Consulting the Manual 7
failure 73 Battery 249 Controls 81
Additional operations 244 Before you drive 174 Controls on the left
Adjusting the front seat belts Before your trip 174 of the steering wheel 81
height (front seats only) 25 Beverage holder on center console 94 Controls on the right
Adjusting the headrest 118 Bodywork 255 of the steering wheel 83
Advice for keeping the bodywork Bose® Infotainment 134 Controls repeated
in good condition 255 Bose® Infotainment 8 on the steering wheel 137
After the 12th maintenance service238 Bose® Infotainment 80 Controls 105
Air conditioning and heating Bose® Surround Sound 145 Controls 135
system 138 Brake fluid 248 Controls 167
Air conditioning system 255 Brake pads worn (*) 71 Controls 77
Brakes 228 Conversion table 260
Air filter 249
Breaking-in 165 Coolant temperature gauge 76
Airbag/pre-tensioner failure (*) 70
Cooling system 227
Alarm memory 116
Courtesy lights (below door) 204
Alphabetical table of contents 269 C Courtesy mirror light 202
Alternator condition (*) 69
Cruise Control 167
Alternator 227 Capacities and recommended
Cruise Control 72
Armrest 121 products 224
Armrest 122 Capacities 174 9
ASR system (electronic anti-skid Capacities: quantity
device) 44 and specifications of the products
ASR system failure 73 to use 224

Table of contents 269


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 270 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

D E External lights and direction


indicators 128
Danger symbols 10 Easy entry/exit system cut-out External rear-view mirrors 125
Dashboard 62 device 102
Deactivating the anti-lift alarm 116 Easy entry/exit system 121 F
Deactivating the motion Easy entry/exit system 127
sensing alarm 116 Electric parking brake 179 Failure indicators 57
Deactivation 115 Electrochromic internal rear-view Fastening the seat belts 24
Defective ABS system (*) 70 mirror 126 Fault indicators 43
Details to be recorded 275 Electronic alarm system 114 Fault indicators 44
Dimensions 232 Electronic automatic gearbox 152 Fault signals 172
Direction indicator side lights 200 Electronic control units 251 Finger-trap prevention device 104
Direction indicators 130 Emergency opening Finger-trap prevention system
Display 76 of the luggage compartment 108 failure 73
Door lock ECU initialization 103 Emergency starting with Fitting the child seat
Door open indicator 103 an auxiliary battery 151 in frontward-facing position 34
Door release in the event of an Emergency starting 111 Fitting the Latch system child seat
accident 103 Emergency starting 190 in rearward-facing position 34
Doors and lids open 73 Emission control devices 177 Flashing the headlights 130
Doors open warning lights 101 Engine and transmission 165 Fog lights 69
Doors 100 Engine compartment fuses 207 “Follow me home” function 131
DOT Quality Grades 183 Engine compartment lid 106 Front airbags 37
Driving at night 175 Engine compartment relay 207 Front and rear dome light 202
Driving conditions 174 Engine compartment 256 Front and rear side airbags 40
Driving in fog 176 Engine control system (OBDII) 166 Front and side airbags 36
Driving in the mountains 176 Engine coolant 247 Front ashtray and cigarette lighter 93
Driving in the rain 175 Engine diagnosis system failure Front automatic heating/air
Driving on snow or ice 176 (OBDII) (*) 69 conditioning controls (A) 140
Duplicating the keys 111 Engine marking 16 Front dome light 88
Dust/pollen filter 249 Engine oil 223 Front seats 118
9 Engine oil 246 Fuel consumption (m.p.g. (USA)) 223
Engine 226 Fuel consumption 223
EPB automatic operation disabled 74 Fuel cut-out inertia switch 58
Excessive coolant temperature 73 Fuel economy 163
Fuel level gauge 75
270 Table of contents
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 271 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Fuel Requirements 222 H Importance of proper inflation


Fuel tank door emergency pressure 184
opening 109 Handbrake engaged (*) 71 In the event of an accident 219
Fuel tank door 109 Handholds 95 Increasing the speed stored
Fuse colors 205 Headlight clusters 199 in the memory 168
Fuses and relays in the engine Headlight washers 132 Indicators and warning lights 69
compartment 206 Headlights 173 Inertia switch, fuel cut-out enabled 72
Fuses and relays in the passenger Headrest 120 Injection – Ignition 226
compartment, to the left of the Headrests 124 Instruction labels 19
steering wheel 210 Height adjustment 118 Instrument panel 68
Fuses inside the luggage High beams 130 Instruments and gauges 75
compartment 214 High beams 69 Interior 257
Fuses inside the passenger High catalyst temperature 72 Internal Equipment 87
compartment, to the left of the Historical info 4 Introduction 7
steering wheel 211 HomeLink 89
Homologation labels 17
K
G How to keep seat belts efficient 28
How to use the tires 252 Key codes 21
Gasoline Containing Alcohol Keys 110
& Ethers ("Oxygenated Fuels") 222 I
Gearbox oil 247
Gearshift levers on the steering Ice hazard 73 L
wheel (optional) 162 Identification plates 16
General warnings for using the seat Latch system 33
If a fuse blows 205
belts 27 Leather upholstery treatment 257
If a tire gets a puncture 192 Left-hand direction indicators 71
General warnings 41 If an exterior light goes out 199
General 167 Level checks 245
If an interior light goes out 202 License plate lights failure 72
Getting into the vehicle when the If the battery is flat 216
alarm system is on 115 License plate lights 201
If the vehicle is not used for long Light switch 128
Glossary of tire terminology 182
periods 258
Glove compartment 94
If there are injured persons 219
Lights failure 72 9
Glove compartment, glove box Load limiting devices 26
If you have to jack up the vehicle 217 Low brake fluid warning light (*) 70
and luggage compartment light 203
If you have to tow the vehicle 218 Low engine oil level 73
Ignition switch 113 "Low grip" function 74

Table of contents 271


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 272 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Low oil pressure (*) 70 Operation 110 Rear ashtray 94


Low pressure 49 Ordering extra radio operated Rear automatic heating/air
Lubrication system 227 controls 116 conditioning controls (B)
Luggage compartment 107 Other advices 178 (optional) 141
Lumbar support adjustment 118 Other system functions 157 Rear control panel 144
Other tire markings 184 Rear dome light 88
Rear door sunshades (optional) 93
M Rear fog lights 69
P Rear seat adjustments 122
Main operations to be carried
out at the indicated Parking brake failure (*) 71 Rear seats 122
kilometers/mileage 240 Parking lights 128 Rear window sunshade 92
Main panel controls 136 Parking lights 69 Rear-view mirrors 125
Malfunction indication 160 Parking sensors failure 73 Recalling the speed stored in the
Map pockets 95 Parking sensors 54 memory 168
Maserati CODE (*) 71 Parking 179 Reconnecting the battery 259
Maxi fuse colors 205 Parts in premium quality wood 257 Reducing the speed stored in the
MSP system failure (*) 71 Performance 231 memory 169
MSP System 43 Position lights/low beams 69 Refitting the standard wheel 198
MSR function (engine braking Position of fuses/relays 205 Relay/fuse boxes inside the luggage
torque adjustment) 44 Power steering failure 72 compartment 213
Power steering fluid 248 Relays in the passenger
Power windows 104 compartment, on the left of the
N steering wheel 211
Precautions in the event
of a puncture 192 Relays inside the luggage
NHTSA’s Toll-free
Pretensioners 26 compartment 214
Auto Safety Hotline 8
Proper transport of children 29 Replacing radio operated control
Normal conditions 49
Protection from atmospheric batteries 117
agents 255 Replacing the fuses 205
O Push start 161 Replacing the windshield wiper
blades 254
Octane Rating 222
9 Opening doors from the outside 100 R
Resetting the speed stored in the
memory 169
Opening from the inside 101 Resetting the switch 58
Operation in manual Rain sensor failure 73
Restarting the vehicle 258
and automatic modes 104 Rain sensor 133
Right-hand direction indicators 71

272 Table of contents


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 273 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Roof controls 86 Speed-sensitive steering 228 Temperature 183


RPM indicator screen page 80 “SPORT” setting 74 The Maserati CODE system 110
“Run Flat” tire puncture 50 Spray nozzles 254 Third stop light 201
“Run Flat” tires (optional) 9 Starting the engine 150 Tire care 185
Starting with an auxiliary battery 216 Tire identification number: 182
S Starting-off when the engine Tire placard/label 184
is cold 150 Tire pressure (*) 70
Safe driving 174 Steering wheel 127 Tire pressure monitoring system
Scheduled Maintenance Services 238 Stop & Go function 55 failure 52
Scheduled maintenance 74 Stop lights failure 72 Tire pressure monitoring system 47
Seat belts 24 Storing a speed 168 Tire pressure screen page 78
Seat belts (*) 70 Storing the seats and external Tire pressure 233
Seat heating 74 rear-view mirrors positions 120 Tire punctures 50
Seat inclination adjustment Sun visors 92 Tires 182
(tilting) 118 Sunroof 87 Toolkit 191
Seat massage 74 Suspension 228 Towing the vehicle 161
Seat ventilation 74 Symbols indicating compulsory Towing the vehicle 9
Seatback rake adjustment 118 measures 11 Traction 183
Self-adaptive seats 74 Symbols of prohibitions 10 Transmission 227
Self-diagnosis 170 Symbols 10 Transport of persons with disability 35
Sensor failure 133 System calibration 48 Travelling 175
Sensor range 56 System initialization 144 Treadwear 183
+ / - – Sequential manual System not active 53 TRIP screen page 78
operation (MANUAL) 157 System not calibrated 52 Turning off the engine 151
Service 8 System temporarily not active 53 Twilight sensor failure 72
Settings 171 Twilight sensor 129
Shock absorber failure 73 T
Side buttons on the Bose® U
Infotainment 84 Table of contents 264
Skyhook suspension 170 Tables (optional) 96 Underdoor courtesy light 103
Snow chains 186 Tachometer 75 Unleaded Fuel 222 9
Spare wheel Taillight clusters 199 Updating 7
(emergency wheel - optional) 194 Technical specifications 226 Use of the engine 165
Spark plugs 251 Temperature controlled beverage Useful accessories to keep
Speedometer 75 holder 95 on-board 187
Table of contents 273
M139_UM_usa1.book Page 274 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Useful advice for extending X


the life of the battery 250
Using the brakes 164 Xenon headlights 173
Using the jack 217
Using the rear seat belts 25

V
Vehicle load limits: 185
Vehicle protection systems 73
Viewing messages on the display 48

W
WARNING - Air filter 244
WARNING - Engine oil 244
Warning lights on the display 72
Warning symbols 11
Weights 231
Wheels and tires 252
Wheels 229
While driving 165
Windshield washer fluid 72
Windshield washer 132
Windshield wiper/washer
and headlight washers 132
Windshield wipers 132
Windshield wipers 254
Windshield/headlight washer fluid 247
Winter Pack (optional) 124
9 Winter Pack 119
Winter tires 186

274 Table of contents


M139_UM_usa1.book Page 275 Monday, September 1, 2008 2:39 PM

Details to be recorded

Owner License plate

Registration no.

Address Engine identification no.

Paint identification no.

Code number of spare parts

Table of contents 275


Cap9_usa.fm Page 276 Wednesday, September 24, 2008 4:00 PM

Because of the evolutions of the MASERATI products, which are


continually developed and perfected, MASERATI S.p.A. reserves
the right to make modifications to this manual as well as to the
technical contents, functions and equipment of the vehicles
delivered.

Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the


contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations)
in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of
going to print.

© 2008. Maserati S.p.A. All rights reserved.

Publication no. 81953700 - 2nd Edition - 09/2008


This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated,
even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A.